Insecticidal protein toxins from Photorhabdus

Abstract

Proteins from the genus Photorhabdus are toxic to insects upon exposure. Photorhabdus luminescens (formerly Xenorhabdus luminescens) have been found in mammalian clinical samples and as a bacterial symbiont of entomopathogenic nematodes of genus Heterorhabditis. These protein toxins can be applied to, or genetically engineered into, insect larvae food and plants for insect control.

Description

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

[0002] The present invention relates to toxins isolated from bacteria and the use of said toxins as insecticides.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0003] Many insects are widely regarded as pests to homeowners, to picnickers, to gardeners, and to farmers and others whose investments in agricultural products are often destroyed or diminished as a result of insect damage to field crops. Particularly in areas where the growing season is short, significant insect damage can mean the loss of all profits to growers and a dramatic decrease in crop yield. Scarce supply of particular agricultural products invariably results in higher costs to food processors and, then, to the ultimate consumers of food plants and products derived from those plants.

[0004] Preventing insect damage to crops and flowers and eliminating the nuisance of insect pests have typically relied on strong organic pesticides and insecticides with broad toxicities. These synthetic products have come under attack by the general copulation as being too harsh on the environment and on those exposed to such agents. Similarly in non-agricultural settings, homeowners would be satisfied to have insects avoid their homes or outdoor meals without needing to kill the insects.

[0005] The extensive use of chemical insecticides has raised environmental and health concerns for farmers, companies that produce the insecticides, government agencies, public interest groups, and the public in general. The development of less intrusive pest management strategies has been spurred along both by societal concern for the environment and by the development of biological tools which exploit mechanisms of insect management. Biological control agents present a promising alternative to chemical insecticides.

[0006] Organisms at every evolutionary development level have devised means to enhance their own success and survival. The use of biological molecules as tools of defense and aggression is known throughout the animal and plant kingdoms. In addition, the relatively new tools of the genetic engineer allow modifications to biological insecticides to accomplish particular solutions to particular problems.

[0007] One such agent, Bacillus thuringiensis (Bt), is an effective insecticidal agent, and is widely commercially used as such. In fact, the insecticidal agent of the Bt bacterium is a protein which has such limited toxicity, it can be used on human food crops on the day of harvest. To non-targeted organisms, the Bt toxin is a digestible non-toxic protein.

[0008] Another known class of biological insect control agents are certain genera of nematodes known to be vectors of transmission for insect-killing bacterial symbionts. Nematodes containing insecticidal bacteria invade insect larvae. The bacteria then kill the larvae. The nematodes reproduce in the larval cadaver. The nematode progeny then eat the cadaver from within. The bacteria-containing nematode progeny thus produced can then invade additional larvae.

[0009] In the past, insecticidal nematodes in the Steinernema and Heterorhabditis genera were used as insect control agents. Apparently, each genus of nematode hosts a particular species of bacterium. In nematodes of the Heterorhabditis genus, the symbiotic bacterium is Photorhabdus luminescens.

[0010] Although these nematodes are effective insect control agents, it is presently difficult, expensive, and inefficient to produce, maintain, and distribute nematodes for insect control.

[0011] It has been known in the art that one may isolate an insecticidal toxin from Photorhabdus luminescens that has activity only when injected into Lepidopteran and Coleopteran insect larvae. This has made it impossible to effectively exploit the insecticidal properties of the nematode or its bacterial symbiont. What would be useful would be a more practical, less labor-intensive wide-area delivery method of an insecticidal toxin which would retain its biological properties after delivery. It would be quite desirous to discover toxins with oral activity produced by the genus Photorhabdus. The isolation and use of these toxins are desirous due to efficacious reasons. Until applicants' discoveries, these toxins had not been isolated or characterized.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0012] The native toxins are protein complexes that are produced and secreted by growing bacteria cells of the genus Photorhabdus, of interest are the proteins produced by the species Photorhabdus luminescens. The protein complexes, with a molecular size of approximately 1,000 kDa, can be separated by SDS-PAGE gel analysis into numerous component proteins. The toxins contain no hemolysin, lipase, type C phospholipase, or nuclease activities. The toxins exhibit significant toxicity upon exposure administration to a number of insects.

[0013] The present invention provides an easily administered insecticidal protein as well as the expression of toxin in a heterologous system.

[0014] The present invention also provides a method for delivering insecticidal toxins that are functional active and effective against many orders of insects.

[0015] Objects, advantages, and features of the present invention will become apparent from the following specification.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0016] FIG. 1 is an illustration of a match of cloned DNA isolates used as a part of sequence genes for the toxin of the present invention.

[0017] FIG. 2 is a map of three plasmids used in the sequencing process.

[0018] FIG. 3 is a map illustrating the inter-relationship of several partial DNA fragments.

[0019] FIG. 4 is an illustration of a homology analysis between the protein sequences of TcbAii and TcaBii proteins.

[0020] FIG. 5 is a phenogram of Photorhabdus strains. Relationship of Photorhabdus Strains was defined by rep-PCR. The upper axis of FIG. 5 measures the percentage similarity of strains based on scoring of rep-PCR products (i.e., 0.0 [no similarity] to 1.0 [100% similarity]). At the right axis, the numbers and letters indicate the various strains tested; 14=W-14, Hm=Hm, H9=H9, 7=WX-7, 1=WX-1, 2=WX-2, 88=HP88, NC-1=NC-1, 4=WX-4, 9=WX-9, 8=WX-8, 10=WX-10, WIR=WIR, 3=WX-3, 11=WX-11, 5=WX-5, 6=WX-6, 12=WX-12, x14=WX-14, 15=WX-15, Hb=Hb, B2=B2, 48 through 52=ATCC 43948 through ATCC 43952. Vertical lines separating horizontal lines indicate the degree of relatedness (as read from the extrapolated intersection of the vertical line with the upper axis) between strains or groups of strains at the base of the horizontal lines (e.g., strain W-14 is approximately 60% similar to strains H9 and Hm).

[0021] FIG. 6 is an illustration of the genomic maps of the W-14 Strain.

[0022] FIG. 6A is an illustration of the tca and tcb loci and primary gene products.

[0023] FIG. 7 is a phenogram of Photorhabdus strains as defined by rep-PCR. The upper axis of FIG. 7 measures the percentage similarity of strains based on scoring of rep-PCR products (i.e., 0.0 [no similarity] to 1.0 [100% similarity]). At the right axis, the numbers and letters indicate the various strains tested. Vertical lines separating horizontal lines indicate the degree of relatedness (as read from the extrapolated intersection of the vertical line with the upper axis) between strains or groups of strains at the base of the horizontal lines (e.g., strain Indicus is approximately 30% similar to strains MP1 and HB Oswego). Note that the Photorhabdus strains on the phenogram are as follows: 14=W-14; Hm=Hm; H9=H9; 7=WX-7; 1=WX-1; 2=WX-2; 88=HP88; NC1=NC-1; 4=WX-4; 9=WX-9; 8=WX-8; 10=WX-10; 30=W30; WIR=WIR; 3-WX-3; 11=WX-11; 5=WX-5; 6=WX-6; 12=WX-12; 15=WX-15; X14=WX-14; Hb=Hb; B2=B2; 48=ATCC 43948; 49=ATCC 43949; 50=ATCC 43950; 51=ATCC 43951; 52=ATCC 43952.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0024] The present inventions are directed to the discovery of a unique class of insecticidal protein toxins from the genus Photorhabdus that have oral toxicity against insects. A unique feature of Photorhabdus is its bioluminescence. Photorhabdus may be isolated from a variety of sources. One such source is nematodes, more particularly nematodes of the genus Heterorhabditis. Another such source is from human clinical samples from wounds, see Farmer et al. 1989 J. Clin. Microbiol. 27 pp. 1594-1600. These saprohytic strains are deposited in the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, Md.) ATCC #s 43948, 43949, 43950, 43951, and 43952, and are incorporated herein by reference. It is possible that other sources could harbor Photorhabdus bacteria that produce insecticidal toxins. Such sources in the environment could be either terrestrial or aquatic based.

[0025] The genus Photorhabdus is taxonomically defined as a member of the Family Enterobacteriaceae, although it has certain traits atypical of this family. For example, strains of this genus are nitrate reduction negative, yellow and red pigment producing and bioluminescent. This latter trait is otherwise unknown within the Enterobacteriaceae. Photorhabdus has only recently been described as a genus separate from the Xenorhabdus (Boemare et al., 1993 Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 43, 249-255). This differentiation is based on DNA-DNA hybridization studies, phenotypic differences (e.g., presence (Photorhabdus) or absence (Xenorhabdus) of catalase and bioluminescence) and the Family of the nematode host (Xenorhabdus; Steinernematidae, Photorhabdus; Heterorhabditidae). Comparative, cellular fatty-acid analyses (Janse et al. 1990, Lett. Appl. Microbiol 10, 131-135; Suzuki et al. 1990, J. Gen. Appl. Microbiol., 36, 393-401) support the separation of Photorhabdus from Xenorhabdus.

[0026] In order to establish that the strain collection disclosed herein was comprised of Photorhabdus strains, the strains were characterized based on recognized traits which define Photorhabdus and differentiate it from other Enterobacteriaceae and Xenorhabdus species. (Farmer, 1984 Bergey's Manual of Systemic Bacteriology Vol. 1 pp.510-511; Akhurst and Boemare 1988, J. Gen. Microbiol. 134 pp. 1835-1845; Boemare et al. 1993 Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 43 pp. 249-255, which are incorporated herein by reference). The traits studied were the following: gram stain negative rods, organism size, colony pigmentation, inclusion bodies, presence of catalase, ability to reduce nitrate, bioluminescence, dye uptake, gelatin hydrolysis, growth on selective media, growth temperature, survival under anerobic conditions and motility. Fatty acid analysis was used to confirm that the strains herein all belong to the single genus Photorhabdus.

[0027] Currently, the bacterial genus Photorhabdus is comprised of a single defined species, Photorhabdus luminescens (ATCC Type strain #29999, Poinar et al., 1977, Nematologica 23, 97-102). A variety of related strains have been described in the literature (e.g., Akhurst et al. 1988 J. Gen. Microbiol., 134, 1835-1845; Boemare et al. 1993 Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 43 pp. 249-255; Putz et al. 1990, Appl. Environ. Microbiol., 56, 181-186). Numerous Photorhabdus strains have been characterized herein. Because there is currently only one species (luminescens) defined within the genus Photorhabdus, the luminescens species traits were used to characterize the strains herein. As can be seen in FIG. 5, these strains are quite diverse. It is not unforeseen that in the future there may be other Photorhabdus species that will have some of the attributes of the luminescens species as well as some different characteristics that are presently not defined as a trait of Photorhabdus luminescens. However, the scope of the invention herein is to any Photorhabdus species or strains which produce proteins that have functional activity as insect control agents, regardless of other traits and characteristics.

[0028] Furthermore, as is demonstrated herein, the bacteria of the genus Photorhabdus produce proteins that have functional activity as defined herein. Of particular interest are proteins produced by the species Photorhabdus luminescens. The inventions herein should in no way be limited to the strains which are disclosed herein. These strains illustrate for the first time that proteins produced by diverse isolates of Photorhabdus are toxic upon exposure to insects. Thus, included within the inventions described herein are the strains specified herein and any mutants thereof, as well as any strains or species of the genus Photorhabdus that have the functional activity described herein.

[0029] There are several terms that are used herein that have a particular meaning and are as follows:

[0030] By “functional activity” it is meant herein that the protein toxin(s) function as insect control agents in that the proteins are orally active, or have a toxic effect, or are able to disrupt or deter feeding, which may or may not cause death of the insect. When an insect comes into contact with an effective amount of toxin delivered via transgenic plant expression, formulated protein compositions(s), sprayable protein composition(s), a bait matrix or other delivery system, the results are typically death of the insect, or the insects do not feed upon the source which makes the toxins available to the insects.

[0031] By the use of the term “genetic material” herein, it is meant to include all genes, nucleic acid, DNA and RNA.

[0032] By “homolog” it is meant an amino acid sequence that is identified as possessing homology to a reference W-14 toxin polypeptide amino acid sequence.

[0033] By “homology” it is meant an amino acid sequence that has a similarity index of at least 33% and/or an identity index of at least 26% to a reference W-14 toxin polypeptide amino acid sequence, as scored by the GAP algorithm using the B10sum 62 protein scoring matrix (Wisconsin Package Version 9.0, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), Madison, Wis.).

[0034] By “identity” is meant an amino acid sequence that contains an identical residue at a given position, following alignment with a reference W-14 toxin polypeptide amino acid sequence by the GAP algorithm.

[0035] The protein toxins discussed herein are typically referred to as “insecticides”. By insecticides it is meant herein that the protein toxins have a “functional activity” as further defined herein and are used as insect control agents.

[0036] By the use of the term “oligonucleotides” it is meant a macromolecule consisting of a short chain of nucleotides of either RNA or DNA. Such length could be at least one nucleotide, but typically are in the range of about 10 to about 12 nucleotides. The determination of the length of the oligonucleotide is well within the skill of an artisan and should not be a limitation herein. Therefore, oligonucleotides may be less than 10 or greater than 12.

[0037] By the use of the term “Photorhabdus toxin” it is meant any protein produced by a Photorhabdus microorganism strain which has functional activity against insects, where the Photorhabdustoxin could be formulated as a sprayable composition, expressed by a transgenic plant, formulated as a bait matrix, delivered via baculovirus, or delivered by any other applicable host or delivery system.

[0038] By the use of the term “toxic” or “toxicity” as used herein it is meant that the toxins produced by Photorhabdus have “functional activity” as defined herein.

[0039] By “truncated peptide” it is meant herein to include any peptide that is fragment(s) of the peptides observed to have functional activity.

[0040] By “substantial sequence homology” is meant either: a DNA fragment having a nucleotide sequence sufficiently similar to another DNA fragment to produce a protein having similar biochemical properties; or a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence sufficiently similar to another polypeptide to exhibit similar biochemical properties.

[0041] Fermentation broths from selected strains reported in Table 20 were used to determine the following: breadth of insecticidal toxin production by the Photorhabdus genus, the insecticidal spectrum of these toxins, and to provide source material to purify the toxin complexes. The strains characterized herein have been shown to have oral toxicity against a variety of insect orders. Such insect orders include but are not limited to Coleoptera, Homoptera, Lepidoptera, Diptera, Acarina, Hymenoptera and Dictyoptera.

[0042] As with other bacterial toxins, the rate of mutation of the bacteria in a population causes many related toxins slightly different in sequence to exist. Toxins of interest here are those which produce protein complexes toxic to a variety of insects upon exposure, as described herein. Preferably, the toxins are active against Lepidoptera, Coleoptera, Homopotera, Diptera, Hymenoptera, Dictyoptera and Acarina. The inventions herein are intended to capture the protein toxins homologous to protein toxins produced by the strains herein and any derivative strains thereof, as well as any protein toxins produced by Photorhabdus. These homologous proteins may differ in sequence, but do not differ in function from those toxins described herein. Homologous toxins are meant to include protein complexes of between 300 kDa to 2,000 kDa and are comprised of at least two (2) subunits, where a subunit is a peptide which may or may not be the same as the other subunit. Various protein subunits have been identified and are taught in the Examples herein. Typically, the protein subunits are between about 18 kDa to about 230 kDa; between about 160 kDa to about 230 kDa; 100 kDa to 160 kDa; about 80 kDa to about 100 kDa; and about 50 kDa to about 80 kDa.

[0043] As discussed above, some Photorhabdus strains can be isolated from nematodes. Some nematodes, elongated cylindrical parasitic worms of the phylum Nematoda, have evolved an ability to exploit insect larvae as a favored growth environment. The insect larvae provide a source of food for growing nematodes and an environment in which to reproduce. One dramatic effect that follows invasion of larvae by certain nematodes is larval death. Larval death results from the presence of, in certain nematodes, bacteria that produce an insecticidal toxin which arrests larval growth and inhibits feeding activity.

[0044] Interestingly, it appears that each genus of insect parasitic nematode hosts a particular species of bacterium, uniquely adapted for symbiotic growth with that nematode. In the interim since this research was initiated, the name of the bacterial genus Xenorhabdus was reclassified into the Xenorhabdus and the Photorhabdus. Bacteria of the genus Photorhabdus are characterized as being symbionts of Heterorhabditus nematodes while Xenorhabdus species are symbionts of the Steinernema species. This change in nomenclature is reflected in this specification, but in no way should a change in nomenclature alter the scope of the inventions described herein.

[0045] The peptides and genes that are disclosed herein are named according to the guidelines recently published in the Journal of Bacteriology “Instructions to Authors” p. i-xii (January 1996), which is incorporated herein by reference. The following peptides and genes were isolated from Photorhabdus strain W-14.

TABLE 1
Peptide/Gene Nomenclature
Toxin Complex
1	2	3	4
Peptide	Peptide	Gene	Gene
Name	Sequence ID No.*	Name	Sequence ID No.*
tca genomic region
TcaA	34c	tcaA	33
TcaAi	pro-peptide	tcaA	—
TcaAii	[15]a, 34c	tcaA	—
TcaAiii	[4]a, 35c	tcaA	—
TcaAiv	[62]a	tcaA	—
TcaB	[3]a, (19, 20)b, 26c	tcaB	25
TcaBi	[3]a, (19, 20)b, 28c	tcaB	27
TcaBii	[5]a, 30c	tcaB	29
TcaC	[2]a, 32c	tcaC	31
tcb genomic region
TcbA	12c, [16]a, (21,	tcbA	11
	22, 23, 24)b
TcbAi	pro-peptide	tcbA	—
TcbAii	[1]a, (21, 22, 23,	tcbA	52
	24)b, 53c
TcbAiii	[40]a, 55c	tcbA	54
tcc genomic region
TccA	[8]a, 57c	tccA	56
TccB	[7]a, 59c	tccB	58
TccC	61c	tccC	60
tcd genomic region
TcdA	(17, 18, 37, 38,	tcdA	(36)d, 46
	39, 42, 43)b, 47c
TcdAi	pro-peptide	tcdA	—
TcdAii	[13]a, (17, 18, 37,	tcdA	48
	38, 39)b, 49c
TcdAiii	[41]a, (42, 43)b,	tcdA	50
	51c
TcdB	[14]a	tcdB	—
aSequence ID No. 's in brackets are peptide N-termini;
bNumbers in parentheses are N-termini of internal peptide tryptic fragments
cdeduced from gene sequence
dinternal gene fragment

[0046] The sequences listed above are grouped by genomic region. More specifically, the Photorhabdus luminesence bacteria (W-14) has at least four distinct genomic regions—tca, tcb, tcc and tcd. As can be seen in Table 1, peptide products are produced from these distinct genomic regions. Furthermore, as illustrated in the Examples, specifically Examples 15 and 21, individual gene products produced from three genomic regions are associated with insect activity. There is also considerable homology between these four genomic regions.

[0047] As is further illustrated in the Examples, the tcbA gene was expressed in E. coli as two possible biological active protein fragments (TcbA and TcbAii/iii). The tcdA gene was also expressed in E. coli. As illustrated in Example 16, when the native unprocessed TcbA toxin was treated with the endogeneous metalloproteases or insect gut contents containing proteases, the TcbA protein toxin was processed into smaller subunits that were less than the size of the native peptides and Southern Corn Rootworm activity increased. The smaller toxin peptides remained associated as part of a toxin complex. It may be desirable in some situations to increase activation of the toxin(s) by proteolytic processing or using truncated peptides. Thus, it may be more desirable to use truncated peptide(s) in some applications, i.e., commercial transgenic plant applications.

[0048] In addition to the W-14 strain, there are other species within the Photorhabdus genus that have functional activity which is differential (specifically see Tables 20 and 36). Even though there is differential activity, the amino acid sequences in some cases have substantial sequence homology. Moreover, the molecular probes indicate that some genes contained in the strains are homologous to the genes contained in the W-14 strain. In fact all of the strains illustrated herein have one or more homologs of W-14 toxin genes. The antibody data in Example 26 and the N-terminal sequence data in Example 25 further support the conclusion that there is homology and identity (based on amino acid sequence) between the protein toxin(s) produced by these strains. At the molecular level, the W-14 gene probes indicated that the homologs or the W-14 genes themselves (Tables 37, 38, and 39) are dispersed throughout the Photorhabdus genus. Further, it is possible that new toxin genes exist in other strains which are not homologous to W-14, but maintain overall protein attributes (see specifically Examples 14 and 25).

[0049] Even though there is homology or identity between toxin genes produced by the Photorhabdus strains, the strains themselves are quite diverse. Using polymerase chain reaction technology further discussed in Example 22, most of the strains illustrated herein are quite distinguishable. For example as can be seen in FIG. 5, the percentage relative similarity of some of the strains, such as HP88 and NC-1, was about 0.8, which indicates that the strains are similar, while HP88 and Hb was about 0.1, which indicates substantial diversity. Therefore, even though the insect toxin genes or gene products that the strains produce are the same or similar, the strains themselves are diverse.

[0050] In view of the data further disclosed in the Examples and discussions herein, it is clear that a new and unique family of insecticidal protein toxin(s) has been discovered. It has been further illustrated herein that these toxin(s) widely exist within bacterial strains of the Photorhabdus genus. It may also be the case that these toxin genes widely exist within the family Enterobacteracaea. Antibodies prepared as described in Example 21 or gene probes prepared as described in Example 25 may be used to further screen for bacterial strains within the family Enterobacteracaea that produce the homologous toxin(s) that have functional activity. It may also be the case that specific primer sets exist that could facilitate the identification of new genes within the Photorhabdus genus or family Enterobacteracaea.

[0051] As stated above, the antibodies may be used to rapidly screen bacteria of the genus Photorhabdus or the family Enterbacteracaea for homologous toxin products as illustrated in Example 26. Those skilled in the art are quite familiar with the use of antibodies as an analysis or screening tool (see U.S. Pat. No. 5,430,137, which is incorporated herein by reference). Moreover, it is generally accepted in the literature that antibodies are elicited against 6 to 20 amino acid residue segments that tend to occupy exposed surface of polypeptides (Current Protocols in Immunology, Coligan et al, National Institutes of Health, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.). Usually the amino acid consist of contiguous amino acid residues, however, in certain cases they may be formed by non-contiguous amino acids that are constrained by specific conformation. The amino acid segments recognized by antibodies are highly specific and commonly referred to epitopes. The amino acid fragment can be generated by chemical and/or enzymatic cleavage of the native protein, by automated, solid-phase peptide synthesis, or by production from genetic engineering organisms. Polypeptide fragments can be isolated by a variety and/or combination of HPLC and FPLC chromatographic methods known in the art. Selection of polypeptide fragment can be aided by the use of algorithms, for example Kyte and Doolittle, 1982, Journal of Molecular Biology 157: 105-132 and Chou and Fasman, 1974, Biochemistry 13: 222-245, that predict those sequences most likely to exposed on the surface of the protein. For preparation of immunogen containing the polypeptide fragment of interest, in general, polypeptides are covalently coupled using chemical reactions to carrier proteins such as keyhole limpet hemocyanin via free amino (lysine), sulfhydyl (cysteine), phenolic (tyrosine) or carboxylic (aspartate or glutamate) groups. Immunogen with an adjuvant is injected in animals, such as mice or rabbits, or chickens to elicit an immune response against the immunogen. Analysis of antibody titer in antisera of inject animals against polypeptide fragment can be determined by a variety of immunological methods such as ELISA and Western blot. Alternatively, monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using spleen cells of the injected animal for fusion with tumor cells to produce immortalized hybridomas cells producing a single antibody species. Hybridomas cells are screened using immunological methods to select lines that produce a specific antibody to the polypeptide fragment of interest. Purification of antibodies from different sources can be performed by a variety of antigen affinity or antibody affinity columns or other chromatographic HPLC or FPLC methods.

[0052] The toxins described herein are quite unique in that the toxins have functional activity, which is key to developing an insect management strategy. In developing an insect management strategy, it is possible to delay or circumvent the protein degradation process by injecting a protein directly into an organism, avoiding its digestive tract. In such cases, the protein administered to the organism will retain its function until it is denatured, non-specifically degraded, or eliminated by the immune system in higher organisms. Injection into insects of an insecticidal toxin has potential application only in the laboratory, and then only on large insects which are easily injected. The observation that the insecticidal protein toxins herein described exhibits their toxic activity after oral ingestion or contact with the toxins permits the development of an insect management plan based solely on the ability to incorporate the protein toxins into the insect diet. Such a plan could result in the production of insect baits.

[0053] The Photorhabdus toxins may be administered to insects in a purified form. The toxins may also be delivered in amounts from about 1 to about 100 mg/liter of broth. This may vary upon formulation condition, conditions of the inoculum source, techniques for isolation of the toxin, and the like. The toxins may be administered as an exudate secretion or cellular protein originally expressed in a heterologous prokaryotic or eukaryotic host. Bacteria are typically the hosts in which proteins are expressed. Eukaryotic hosts could include but are not limited to plants, insects and yeast. Alternatively, the toxins may be produced in bacteria or transgenic plants in the field or in the insect by a baculovirus vector. Typically the toxins will be introduced to the insect by incorporating one or more of the toxins into the insects' feed.

[0054] Complete lethality to feeding insects is useful but is not required to achieve useful toxicity. If the insects avoid the toxin or cease feeding, that avoidance will be useful in some applications, even if the effects are sublethal. For example, if insect resistant transgenic crop plants are desired, a reluctance of insects to feed on the plants is as useful as lethal toxicity to the insects since the ultimate objective is protection of the plants rather than killing the insect.

[0055] There are many other ways in which toxins can be incorporated into an insect's diet. As an example, it is possible to adulterate the larval food source with the toxic protein by spraying the food with a protein solution, as disclosed herein. Alternatively, the purified protein could be genetically engineered into an otherwise harmless bacterium, which could then be grown in culture, and either applied to the food source or allowed to reside in the soil in an area in which insect eradication was desirable. Also, the protein could be genetically engineered directly into an insect food source. For instance, the major food source of many insect larvae is plant material.

[0056] By incorporating genetic material that encodes the insecticidal properties of the Photorhabdus toxins into the genome of a plant eaten by a particular insect pest, the adult or larvae would die after consuming the food plant. Numerous members of the monocotyledonous and dictyledenous genera have been transformed. Transgenic agronmonic crops as well as fruits and vegetables are of commercial interest. Such crops include but are not limited to maize, rice, soybeans, canola, sunflower, alfalfa, sorghum, wheat, cotton, peanuts, tomatoes, potatoes, and the like. Several techniques exist for introducing foreign genetic material into plant cells, and for obtaining plants that stably maintain and express the introduced gene. Such techniques include acceleration of genetic material coated onto microparticles directly into cells (U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,945,050 to Cornell and 5,141,131 to DowElanco). Plants may be transformed using Agrobacterium technology, see U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,177,010 to University of Toledo, 5,104,310 to Texas A&M, European Patent Application 0131624B1, European Patent Applications 120516, 159418B1 and 176,112 to Schilperoot, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,149,645, 5,469,976, 5,464,763 and 4,940,838 and 4,693,976 to Schilperoot, European Patent Applications 116718, 290799, 320500 all to MaxPlanck, European Patent Applications 604662 and 627752 to Japan Tobacco, European Patent Applications 0267159, and 0292435 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,231,019 all to Ciba Geigy, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,463,174 and 4,762,785 both to Calgene, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,004,863 and 5,159,135 both to Agracetus. Other transformation technology includes whiskers technology, see U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,302,523 and 5,464,765 both to Zeneca. Electroporation technology has also been used to transform plants, see WO 87/06614 to Boyce Thompson Institute, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,472,869 and 5,384,253 both to Dekalb, WO9209696 and WO9321335 both to PGS. All of these transformation patents and publications are incorporated by reference. In addition to numerous technologies for transforming plants, the type of tissue which is contacted with the foreign genes may vary as well. Such tissue would include but would not be limited to embryogenic tissue, callus tissue type I and II, hypocotyl, meristem, and the like. Almost all plant tissues may be transformed during dedifferentiation using appropriate techniques within the skill of an artisan.

[0057] Another variable is the choice of a selectable marker. The preference for a particular marker is at the discretion of the artisan, but any of the following selectable markers may be used along with any other gene not listed herein which could function as a selectable marker. Such selectable markers include but are not limited to aminoglycoside phosphotransferase gene of transposon Tn5 (Aph II) which encodes resistance to the antibiotics kanamycin, neomycin and G418, as well as those genes which code for resistance or tolerance to glyphosate; hygromycin; methotrexate; phosphinothricin (bialophos); imidazolinones, sulfonylureas and triazolopyrimidine herbicides, such as chlorosulfuron; bromoxynil, dalapon and the like.

[0058] In addition to a selectable marker, it may be desirous to use a reporter gene. In some instances a reporter gene may be used without a selectable marker. Reporter genes are genes which are typically not present or expressed in the recipient organism or tissue. The reporter gene typically encodes for a protein which provides for some phenotypic change or enzymatic property. Examples of such genes are provided in K. Weising et al. Ann. Rev. Genetics, 22, 421 (1988), which is incorporated herein by reference. A preferred reporter gene is the glucuronidase (GUS) gene.

[0059] Regardless of transformation technique, the gene is preferably incorporated into a gene transfer vector adapted to express the Photorhabdus toxins in the plant cell by including in the vector a plant promoter. In addition to plant promoters, promoters from a variety of sources can be used efficiently in plant cells to express foreign genes. For example, promoters of bacterial origin, such as the octopine synthase promoter, the nopaline synthase promoter, the mannopine synthase promoter; promoters of viral origin, such as the cauliflower mosaic virus (35S and 19S), reengineered 35S, known as 35T (see PCT/US96/16582, WO 97/13402 published Apr. 17, 1997, which is incorporated herein by reference) and the like may be used. Plant promoters include, but are not limited to ribulose-1,6-bisphosphate (RUBP) carboxylase small subunit (ssu), beta-conglycinin promoter, phaseolin promoter, ADH promoter, heat-shock promoters and tissue specific promoters. Promoters may also contain certain enhancer sequence elements that may improve the transcription efficiency. Typical enhancers include but are not limited to Adh-intron 1 and Adh-intron 6. Constitutive promoters may be used. Constitutive promoters direct continuous gene expression in all cells types and at all times (e.g., actin, ubiquitin, CaMV 35S). Tissue specific promoters are responsible for gene expression in specific cell or tissue types, such as the leaves or seeds (e.g., zein, oleosin, napin, ACP) and these promoters may also be used. Promoters may also be are active during a certain stage of the plants' development as well as active in plant tissues and organs. Examples of such promoters include but are not limited to pollen-specific, embryo specific, corn silk specific, cotton fiber specific, root specific, seed endosperm specific promoters and the like.

[0060] Under certain circumstances it may be desirable to use an inducible promoter. An inducible promoter is responsible for expression of genes in response to a specific signal, such as: physical stimulus (heat shock genes); light (RUBP carboxylase); hormone (Em); metabolites; and stress. Other desirable transcription and translation elements that function in plants may be used. Numerous plant-specific gene transfer vectors are known to the art.

[0061] In addition, it is known that to obtain high expression of bacterial genes in plants it is preferred to reengineer the bacterial genes so that they are more efficiently expressed in the cytoplasm of plants. Maize is one such plant where it is preferred to reengineer the bacterial gene(s) prior to transformation to increase the expression level of the toxin in the plant. One reason for the reengineering is the very low G+C content of the native bacterial gene(s) (and consequent skewing towards high A+T content). This results in the generation of sequences mimicking or duplicating plant gene control sequences that are known to be highly A+T rich. The presence of some A+T-rich sequences within the DNA of the gene(s) introduced into plants (e.g., TATA box regions normally found in gene promoters) may result in aberrant transcription of the gene(s). On the other hand, the presence of other regulatory sequences residing in the transcribed mRNA (e.g., polyadenylation signal sequences (AAUAAA), or sequences complementary to small nuclear RNAs involved in pre-mRNA splicing) may lead to RNA instability. Therefore, one goal in the design of reengineered bacterial gene(s), more preferably referred to as plant optimized gene(s), is to generate a DNA sequence having a higher G+C content, and preferably one close to that of plant genes coding for metabolic enzymes. Another goal in the design of the plant optimized gene(s) is to generate a DNA sequence that not only has a higher G+C content, but by modifying the sequence changes, should be made so as to not hinder translation.

[0062] An example of a plant that has a high G+C content is maize. The table below illustrates how high the G+C content is in maize. As in maize, it is thought that G+C content in other plants is also high.

TABLE 2
Compilation of G + C Contents of Protein Coding Regions
of Maize Genes
Protein Classa	Range % G + C	Mean % G + Cb
Metabolic Enzymes (40)	44.4-75.3	59.0 (8.0)
Storage Proteins
Group I (23)	46.0-51.9	48.1 (1.3)
Group II (13)	60.4-74.3	67.5 (3.2)
Group I + II (36)	46.0-74.3	55.1 (9.6)c
Structural Proteins (18)	48.6-70.5	63.6 (6.7)
Regulatory Proteins (5)	57.2-68.9	62.0 (4.9)
Uncharacterized Proteins (9)	41.5-70.3	64.3 (7.2)
All Proteins (108)	44.4-75.3	60.8 (5.2)
aNumber of genes in class given in parentheses.
bStandard deviations given in parentheses.
cCombined groups mean ignored in calculation of overall mean.

[0063] For the data in Table 2, coding regions of the genes were extracted from GenBank (Release 71) entries, and base compositions were calculated using the MacVector™ program (IBI, New Haven, Conn.) Intron sequences were ignored in the calculations. Group I and II storage protein gene sequences were distinguished by their marked difference in base composition.

[0064] Due to the plasticity afforded by the redundancy of the genetic code (i.e., some amino acids are specified by more than one codon), evolution of the genomes of different organisms or classes or organisms has resulted in differential usage of redundant codons. This “codon bias” is reflected in the mean base composition of protein coding regions. For example, organisms with relatively low G+C contents utilize codons having A or T in the third position of redundant codons, whereas those having higher G+C contents utilize codons having G or C in the third position. It is thought that the presence of “minor” codons within a gene's mRNA may reduce the absolute translation rate of that mRNA, especially when the relative abundance of the charged tRNA corresponding to the minor codon is low. An extension of this is that the diminution of translation rate by individual minor codons would be at least additive for multiple minor codons. Therefore, mRNAs having high relative contents of minor codons would have correspondingly low translation rates. This rate would be reflected by the synthesis of low levels of the encoded protein.

[0065] In order to reengineer the bacterial gene(s), the codon bias of the plant is determined. The codon bias is the statistical codon distribution that the plant uses for coding its proteins. After determining the bias, the percent frequency of the codons in the gene(s) of interest is determined. The primary codons preferred by the plant should be determined as well as the second and third choice of preferred codons. The amino acid sequence of the protein of interest is reverse translated so that the resulting nucleic acid sequence codes for the same protein as the native bacterial gene, but the resulting nucleic acid sequence corresponds to the first preferred codons of the desired plant. The new sequence is analyzed for restriction enzyme sites that might have been created by the modification. The identified sites are further modified by replacing the codons with second or third choice preferred codons. Other sites in the sequence which could affect the transcription or translation of the gene of interest are the exon:intron 5′ or 3′ junctions, poly A addition signals, or RNA polymerase termination signals. The sequence is further analyzed and modified to reduce the frequency of TA or GC doublets. In addition to the doublets, G or C sequence blocks that have more than about four residues that are the same can affect transcription of the sequence. Therefore, these blocks are also modified by replacing the codons of first or second choice, etc. with the next preferred codon of choice. It is preferred that the plant optimized gene(s) contains about 63% of first choice codons, between about 22% to about 37% second choice codons, and between 15% and 0% third choice codons, wherein the total percentage is 100%. Most preferred the plant optimized gene(s) contain about 63% of first choice codons, at least about 22% second choice codons, about 7.5% third choice codons, and about 7.5% fourth choice codons, wherein the total percentage is 100%. The method described above enables one skilled in the art to modify gene(s) that are foreign to a particular plant so that the genes are optimally expressed in plants. The method is further illustrated in application PCT/US96/16582, WO 97/13402 published Apr. 17, 1997.

[0066] Thus, in order to design plant optimized gene(s) the amino acid sequence of the toxins are reverse translated into a DNA sequence, utilizing a nonredundant genetic code established from a codon bias table compiled for the gene DNA sequence for the particular plant being transformed. The resulting DNA sequence, which is completely homogeneous in codon usage, is further modified to establish a DNA sequence that, besides having a higher degree of codon diversity, also contains strategically placed restriction enzyme recognition sites, desirable base composition, and a lack of sequences that might interfere with transcription of the gene, or translation of the product mRNA.

[0067] It is theorized that bacterial genes may be more easily expressed in plants if the bacterial genes are expressed in the plastids. Thus, it may be possible to express bacterial genes in plants, without optimizing the genes for plant expression, and obtain high express of the protein. See U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,762,785; 5,451,513 and 5,545,817, which are incorporated herein by reference.

[0068] One of the issues regarding commercial exploiting transgenic plants is resistance management. This is of particular concern with Bacillus thuringiensis toxins. There are numerous companies commerically exploiting Bacillus thuringiensis and there has been much concern about Bt toxins becoming resistant. One strataegy for insect resistant management would be to combine the toxins produced by Photorhabdus with toxins such as Bt, vegetative insect proteins (Ciba Geigy) or other toxins. The combinations could be formulated for a sprayable application or could be molecular combinations. Plants could be transformed with Photorhabdus genes that produce insect toxins and other insect toxin genes such as Bt as with other insect toxin genes such as Bt.

[0069] European Patent Application 0400246A1 describes transformation of 2 Bt in a plant, which could be any 2 genes. Another way to produce a transgenic plant that contains more than one insect resistant gene would be to produce two plants, with each plant containing an insect resistant gene. These plants would be backcrossed using traditional plant breeding techniques to produce a plant containing more than one insect resistant gene.

[0070] In addition to producing a transformed plant containing plant optimized gene(s), there are other delivery systems where it may be desirable to reengineer the bacterial gene(s). Along the same lines, a genetically engineered, easily isolated protein toxin fusing together both a molecule attractive to insects as a food source and the insecticidal activity of the toxin may be engineered and expressed in bacteria or in eukaryotic cells using standard, well-known techniques. After purification in the laboratory such a toxic agent with “built-in” bait could be packaged inside standard insect trap housings.

[0071] Another delivery scheme is the incorporation of the genetic material of toxins into a baculovirus vector. Baculoviruses infect particular insect hosts, including those desirably targeted with the Photorhabdus toxins. Infectious baculovirus harboring an expression construct for the Photorhabdus toxins could be introduced into areas of insect infestation to thereby intoxicate or poison infected insects.

[0072] Transfer of the insecticidal properties requires nucleic acid sequences encoding the coding the amino acid sequences for the Photorhabdus toxins integrated into a protein expression vector appropriate to the host in which the vector will reside. One way to obtain a nucleic acid sequence encoding a protein with insecticidal properties is to isolate the native genetic material which produces the toxins from Photorhabdus, using information deduced from the toxin's amino acid sequence, large portions of which are set forth below. As described below, methods of purifying the proteins responsible for toxin activity are also disclosed.

[0073] Using N-terminal amino acid sequence data, such as set forth below, one can construct oligonucleotides complementary to all, or a section of, the DNA bases that encode the first amino acids of the toxin. These oligonucleotides can be radiolabeled and used as molecular probes to isolate the genetic material from a genomic genetic library built from genetic material isolated from strains of Photorhabdus. The genetic library can be cloned in plasmid, cosmid, phage or phagemid vectors. The library could be transformed into Escherichia coli and screened for toxin production by the transformed cells using antibodies raised against the toxin or direct assays for insect toxicity.

[0074] This approach requires the production of a battery of oligonucleotides, since the degenerate genetic code allows an amino acid to be encoded in the DNA by any of several three-nucleotide combinations. For example, the amino acid arginine can be encoded by nucleic acid triplets CGA, CGC, CGG, CGT, AGA, and AGG. Since one cannot predict which triplet is used at those positions in the toxin gene, one must prepare oligonucleotides with each potential triplet represented. More than one DNA molecule corresponding to a protein subunit may be necessary to construct a sufficient number of oligonucleotide probes to recover all of the protein subunits necessary to achieve oral toxicity.

[0075] From the amino acid sequence of the purified protein, genetic materials responsible for the production of toxins can readily be isolated and cloned, in whole or in part, into an expression vector using any of several techniques well-known to one skilled in the art of molecular biology. A typical expression vector is a DNA plasmid, though other transfer means including, but not limited to, cosmids, phagemids and phage are also envisioned. In addition to features required or desired for plasmid replication, such as an origin of replication and antibiotic resistance or other form of a selectable marker such as the bar gene of Streptomyces hygroscopicus or viridochromogenes, protein expression vectors normally additionally require an expression cassette which incorporates the cis-acting sequences necessary for transcription and translation of the gene of interest. The cis-acting sequences required for expression in prokaryotes differ from those required in eukaryotes and plants.

[0076] A eukaryotic expression cassette requires a transcriptional promoter upstream (5′) to the gene of interest, a transcriptional termination region such as a poly-A addition site, and a ribosome binding site upstream of the gene of interest's first codon. In bacterial cells, a useful transcriptional promoter that could be included in the vector is the T7 RNA Polymerase-binding promoter. Promoters, as previously described herein, are known to efficiently promote transcription of mRNA. Also upstream from the gene of interest the vector may include a nucleotide sequence encoding a signal sequence known to direct a covalently linked protein to a particular compartment of the host cells such as the cell surface.

[0077] Insect viruses, or baculoviruses, are known to infect and adversely affect certain insects. The affect of the viruses on insects is slow, and viruses do not stop the feeding of insects. Thus viruses are not viewed as being useful as insect pest control agents. Combining the Photorhabdus toxins genes into a baculovirus vector could provide an efficient way of transmitting the toxins while increasing the lethality of the virus. In addition, since different baculoviruses are specific to different insects, it may be possible to use a particular toxin to selectively target particularly damaging insect pests. A particularly useful vector for the toxins genes is the nuclear polyhedrosis virus. Transfer vectors using this virus have been described and are now the vectors of choice for transferring foreign genes into insects. The virus-toxin gene recombinant may be constructed in an orally transmissible form. Baculoviruses normally infect insect victims through the mid-gut intestinal mucosa. The toxin gene inserted behind a strong viral coat protein promoter would be expressed and should rapidly kill the infected insect.

[0078] In addition to an insect virus or baculovirus or transgenic plant delivery system for the protein toxins of the present invention, the proteins may be encapsulated using Bacillus thuringiensis encapsulation technology such as but not limited to U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,695,455; 4,695,462; 4,861,595 which are all incorporated herein by reference. Another delivery system for the protein toxins of the present invention is formulation of the protein into a bait matrix, which could then be used in above and below ground insect bait stations. Examples of such technology include but are not limited to PCT Patent Application WO 93/23998, which is incorporated herein by reference.

[0079] As is described above, it might become necessary to modify the sequence encoding the protein when expressing it in a non-native host, since the codon preferences of other hosts may differ from that of Photorhabdus. In such a case, translation may be quite inefficient in a new host unless compensating modifications to the coding sequence are made. Additionally, modifications to the amino acid sequence might be desirable to avoid inhibitory cross-reactivity with proteins of the new host, or to refine the insecticidal properties of the protein in the new host. A genetically modified toxin gene might encode a toxin exhibiting, for example, enhanced or reduced toxicity, altered insect resistance development, altered stability, or modified target species specificity.

[0080] In addition to the Photorhabdus genes encoding the toxins, the scope of the present invention is intended to include related nucleic acid sequences which encode amino acid biopolymers homologous to the, toxin proteins and which retain the toxic effect of the Photorhabdus proteins in insect species after oral ingestion.

[0081] For instance, the toxins used in the present invention seem to first inhibit larval feeding before death ensues. By manipulating the nucleic acid sequence of Photorhabdus toxins or its controlling sequences, genetic engineers placing the toxin gene into plants could modulate its potency or its mode of action to, for example, keep the eating-inhibitory activity while eliminating the absolute toxicity to the larvae. This change could permit the transformed plant to survive until harvest without having the unnecessarily dramatic effect on the ecosystem of wiping out all target insects. All such modifications of the gene encoding the toxin, or of the protein encoded by the gene, are envisioned to fall within the scope of the present invention.

[0082] Other envisioned modifications of the nucleic acid include the addition of targeting sequences to direct the toxin to particular parts of the insect larvae for improving its efficiency.

[0083] Strains W-14, ATCC 55397, 43948, 43949, 43950, 43951, 43952 have been deposited in the American Type Culture Collection, 12301 Parklawn Drive, Rockville, Md. 20852 USA. Amino acid and nucleotide sequence data for the W-14 native toxin (ATCC 55397) is presented below. Isolation of the genomic DNA for the toxins from the bacterial hosts is also exemplified herein. The other strains identified herein have been deposited with the United States Department of Agriculture, 1815 North University Drive, Peoria, Ill. 61604.

[0084] Standard and molecular biology techniques were followed and taught in the specification herein. Additional information may be found in Sambrook, J., Fritsch, E. F., and Maniatis, T. (1989), Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press; Current Protocalsin Molecular Biology, ed. F. M. Ausubel et al., (1997), which are both incorporated herein by reference.

[0085] The following abbreviations are used throughout the Examples: Tris=tris (hydroxymethyl) amino methane; SDS=sodium dodecyl sulfate; EDTA=ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, IPTG=isopropylthio-B-galactoside, X-gal=5-bromo-4-chloro-3-indoyl-B-D-galactoside, CTAB=cetyltrimethylammonium bromide; kbp=kilobase pairs; dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP, I=2′-deoxynucleoside 5′-triphosphates of adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine, and inosine, respectively; ATP=adenosine 5′ triphosphate.

EXAMPLE 1

Purification of Toxin from Photorhabdus luminescens and Demonstration of Toxicity after Oral Delivery of Purified Toxin

[0086] The insecticidal protein toxin of the present invention was purified from Photorhabdus luminescens strain W-14, ATCC Accession Number 55397. Stock cultures of Photorhabdus luminescens were maintained on petri dishes containing 2% Proteose Peptone No. 3 (i.e., PP3, Difco Laboratories, Detroit Mich.) in 1.5% agar, incubated at 25° C. and transferred weekly. Colonies of the primary form of the bacteria were inoculated into 200 ml of PP3 broth supplemented with 0.5% polyoxyethylene sorbitan mono-stearate (Tween 60, Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo.) in a one liter flask. The broth cultures were grown for 72 hours at 30° C. on a rotary shaker. The toxin proteins can be recovered from cultures grown in the presence or absence of Tween; however, the absence of Tween can affect the form of the bacteria grown and the profile of proteins produced by the bacteria. In the absence of Tween, a variant shift occurs insofar as the molecular weight of at least one identified toxin subunit shifts from about 200 kDa to about 185 kDa.

[0087] The 72 hour cultures were centrifuged at 10,000×g for 30 minutes to remove cells and debris. The supernatant fraction that contained the insecticidal activity was decanted and brought to 50 mM K2HPO4 by adding an appropriate volume of 1.0 M K2HPO4. The pH was adjusted to 8.6 by adding potassium hydroxide. This supernatant fraction was then mixed with DEAE-Sephacel (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology) which had been equilibrated with 50 mM K2HPO4. The toxic-activity was adsorbed to the DEAE resin. This mixture was then poured into a 2.6×40 cm column and washed with 50 mM K2HPO4 at room temperature at a flow rate of 30 ml/hr until the effluent reached a steady baseline UV absorbance at 280 nm. The column was then washed with 150 mM KCl until the effluent again reached a steady 280 nm baseline. Finally the column was washed with 300 mM KCl and fractions were collected.

[0088] Fractions containing the toxin were pooled and filter sterilized using a 0.2 micron pore membrane filter. The toxin was then concentrated and equilibrated to 100 mM KPO4, pH 6.9, using an ultrafiltration membrane with a molecular weight cutoff of 100 kDa at 4° C. (Centriprep 100, Amicon Division-W. R. Grace and Company). A 3 ml sample of the toxin concentrate was applied to the top of a 2.6×95 cm Sephacryl S-400 HR gel filtration column (Pharmacia LKB Biotechnology). The eluent buffer was 100 mM KPO4, pH 6.9, which was run at a flow rate of 17 ml/hr, at 4° C. The effluent was monitored at 280 nm.

[0089] Fractions were collected and tested for toxic activity. Toxicity of chromatographic fractions was examined in a biological assay using Manduca sexta larvae. Fractions were either applied directly onto the insect diet (Gypsy moth wheat germ diet, ICN Biochemicals Division—ICN Biomedicals, Inc.) or administered by intrahemocelic injection of a 5 μl sample through the first proleg of 4th or 5th instar larva using a 30 gauge needle. The weight of each larva within a treatment group was recorded at 24 hour intervals. Toxicity was presumed if the insect ceased feeding and died within several days of consuming treated insect diet or if death occurred within 24 hours after injection of a fraction.

[0090] The toxic fractions were pooled and concentrated using the Centriprep-100 and were then analyzed by HPLC using a 7.5 mm×60 cm TSK-GEL G-4000 SW gel permeation column with 100 mM potassium phosphate, pH 6.9 eluent buffer running at 0.4 ml/min. This analysis revealed the toxin protein to be contained within a single sharp peak that eluted from the column with a retention time of approximately 33.6 minutes. This retention time corresponded to an estimated molecular weight of 1,000 kDa. Peak fractions were collected for further purification while fractions not containing this protein were discarded. The peak eluted from the HPLC absorbs UV light at 218 and 280 nm but did not absorb at 405 nm. Absorbance at 405 nm was shown to be an attribute of xenorhabdin antibiotic compounds.

[0091] Electrophoresis of the pooled peak fractions in a non-denaturing agarose gel (Metaphor Agarose, FMC BioProducts) showed that two protein complexes are present in the peak. The peak material, buffered in 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0, was separated on a 1.5% agarose stacking gel buffered with 100 mM Tris-HCl at pH 7.0 and 1.9% agarose resolving gel buffered with 200 mM Tris-borate at pH 8.3 under standard buffer conditions (anode buffer 1M Tris-HCl, pH 8.3; cathode buffer 0.025 M Tris, 0.192 M glycine). The gels were run at 13 mA constant current at 15° C. until the phenol red tracking dye reached the end of the gel. Two protein bands were visualized in the agarose gels using Coomassie brilliant blue staining.

[0092] The slower migrating band was referred to as “protein band 1” and faster migrating band was referred to as “protein band 2.” The two protein bands were present in approximately equal amounts. The Coomassie stained agarose gels were used as a guide to precisely excise the two protein bands from unstained portions of the gels. The excised pieces containing the protein bands were macerated and a small amount of sterile water was added. As a control, a portion of the gel that contained no protein was also excised and treated in the same manner as the gel pieces containing the protein. Protein was recovered from the gel pieces by electroelution into 100 mM Tris-borate pH 8.3, at 100 volts (constant voltage) for two hours. Alternatively, protein was passively eluted from the gel pieces by adding an equal volume of 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0, to the gel pieces, then incubating at 30° C. for 16 hours. This allowed the protein to diffuse from the gel into the buffer, which was then collected.

[0093] Results of insect toxicity tests using HPLC-purified toxin (33.6 min. peak) and agarose gel purified toxin demonstrated toxicity of the extracts. Injection of 1.5 μg of the HPLC purified protein kills within 24 hours. Both protein bands 1 and 2, recovered from agarose gels by passive elution or electroelution, were lethal upon injection. The protein concentration estimated for these samples was less than 50 ng/larva. A comparison of the weight gain and the mortality between the groups of larvae injected with protein bands 1 or 2 indicate that protein band 1 was more toxic by injection delivery.

[0094] When HPLC-purified toxin was applied to larval diet at a concentration of 7.5 μg/larva, it caused a halt in larval weight gain (24 larvae tested). The larvae begin to feed, but after consuming only a very small portion of the toxin treated diet they began to show pathological symptoms induced by the toxin and the larvae cease feeding. The insect frass became discolored and most larva showed signs of diarrhea. Significant insect mortality resulted when several 5 μg toxin doses were applied to the diet over a 7-10 day period.

[0095] Agarose-separated protein band 1 significantly inhibited larval weight gain at a dose of 200 ng/larva. Larvae fed similar concentrations of protein band 2 were not inhibited and gained weight at the same rate as the control larvae. Twelve larvae_were fed eluted protein and 45 larvae were fed protein-containing agarose pieces. These two sets of data indicate that protein band 1 was orally toxic to Manduca sexta. In this experiment it appeared that protein band 2 was not toxic to Manduca sexta.

[0096] Further analysis of protein bands 1 and 2 by SDS-PAGE under denaturing conditions showed that each band was composed of several smaller protein subunits. Proteins were visualized by Coomassie brilliant blue staining followed by silver staining to achieve maximum sensitivity.

[0097] The protein subunits in the two bands were very similar. Protein band 1 contains 8 protein subunits of 25.1, 56.2, 60.8, 65.6, 166, 171, 184 and 208 kDa. Protein band 2 had an identical profile except that the 25.1, 60.8, and 65.6 kDa proteins were not present. The 56.2, 60.8, 65.6, and 184 kDa proteins were present in the complex of protein band 1 at approximately equal concentrations and represent 80% or more of the total protein content of that complex.

[0098] The native HPLC-purified toxin was further characterized as follows. The toxin was heat labile in that after being heated to 60° C. for 15 minutes it lost its ability to kill or to inhibit weight gain when injected or fed to Manduca sexta larvae. Assays were designed to detect lipase, type C phospholipase, nuclease or red blood cell hemolysis activities and were performed with purified toxin. None of these activities were present. Antibiotic zone inhibition assays were also done and the purified toxin failed to inhibit growth of Gram-negative or -positive bacteria, yeast or filamentous fungi, indicating that the toxic is not a xenorhabdin antibiotic.

[0099] The native HPLC-purified toxin was tested for ability to kill insects other than Manduca sexta. Table 3 lists insects killed by the HPLC-purified Photorhabdus luminescens toxin in this study.

TABLE 3
Insects Killed by Photorhabdus luminescens Toxin
		Genus and	Route of
Common Name	Order	species	Delivery
Tobacco	Lepidoptera	Manduca sexta	Oral and
horn worm			injected
Mealworm	Coleoptera	Tenebrio molitor	Oral
Pharaoh ant	Hymenoptera	Monomorium pharoanis	Oral
German	Dictyoptera	Blattella germanica	Oral and
cockroach			injected
Mosquito	Diptera	Aedes aegypti	Oral

[0100] Further Characterization of the High Molecular Weight Toxin Complex

[0101] In yet further analysis, the toxin protein complex was subjected to further characterization from W-14 growth medium. The culture conditions and initial purification steps through the S-400 HR column were identical to those described above. After isolation of the high molecular weight toxin complex from the S-400 HR column fractions, the toxic fractions were equilibrated with 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.6, and concentrated in the centriplus 100 (Amicon) concentrators. The protein toxin complex was then applied to a weak anion exchange (WAX) column, Vydac 301VPH575 (Hesparia, Calif.), at a flow rate of 0.5 ml/min. The proteins were eluted with a linear potassium chloride gradient, 0-250 mM KCl, in 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.6 for 50 min. Eight protein peaks were detected by absorbance at 280 nm.

[0102] Bioassays using neonate southern corn rootworm (Diabrotica undecimpunctata howardi, SCR) larvae and tobacco horn worm (Manduca sexta, THW) were performed on all fractions eluted from the HPLC column. THW were grown on Gypsy Moth wheat germ diet (ICN) at 25° C. with a 16 hr light 8 hr dark cycle. SCR were grown on Southern Corn Rootworm Larval Insecta-Diet (BioServ) at 25° C. with a 16 hr light/8 hr dark cycle.

[0103] The highest mortality for SCR and THW larvae was observed for peak 6, which eluted with ca. 112 mM to 132 mM KCl. SDS-PAGE analysis of peak 6 showed predominant peptides of 170 kDa, 66 kDa, 63 kDa, 59.5 kDa and 31 kDa. Western blot analysis was performed on peak 6 protein fraction with a mixture of polyclonal antibodies made against TcaAii-syn, TcaAiii-syn, TcaBii-syn, TcaC-syn, and TcbAii-syn peptides (described in Example 21) and C5F2, a monoclonal antibody against the TcbAiii peptide. Peak 6 contained immuno-reactive bands of 170 kDa, 90 kDa, 66 kDa, 59.5 kDa and 31 kDa. These are very close to the predicted sizes for the TcaC (166 kDa), TcaAii+TcaAiii (92 kDa), TcaAiii (66 kDa), TcaBii (60 kDa) and TcaAii (25 kDa), respectively. Peak 6 which was further analyzed by native agarose gel electrophoresis, as described herein, migrated as a single band with similar mobility to that of band 1.

[0104] The protein concentration of the purified peak 6 toxin protein was determined using the BCA reagents (Pierce). Dilutions of the protein were made in 10 mM Tris, pH 8.6 and applied to the diet bioassays. After 240 hours all neonate larvae on diet bioassays that received 450 ng or greater of the peak 6 protein fraction were dead. The group of larvae that received 90 ng of the same fraction had 40% mortality. After 240 hrs the survivors that received 90 ng and 20 ng of peak 6 protein fraction were ca. 10% and 70%, respectively, of the control weight.

EXAMPLE 2

Insecticide Utility

[0105] The Photorhabdus luminescens utility and toxicity were further characterized. Photorhabdus luminescens (strain W-14) culture broth was produced as follows. The production medium was 2% Bacto Proteose Peptone® Number 3 (PP3, Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) in Milli-Q® deionized water. Seed culture flasks consisted of 175 ml medium placed in a 500 ml tribaffled flask with a Delong neck, covered with a Kaput and autoclaved for 20 minutes, T=250° F. Production flasks consisted of 500 mls in a 2.8 liter 500 ml tribaffled flask with a Delong neck, covered by a Shin-etsu silicon foam closure. These were autoclaved for 45 minutes, T=250° F. The seed culture was incubated at 28° C. at 150 rpm in a gyrotory shaking incubator with a 2 inch throw. After 16 hours of growth, 1% of the seed culture was placed in the production flask which was allowed to grow for 24 hours before harvest. Production of the toxin appears to be during log phase growth. The microbial broth was transferred to a 1 L centrifuge bottle and the cellular biomass was pelleted (30 minutes at 2500 RPM at 4° C., [R.C.F.=about 1600] HG-4L Rotor RC3 Sorval centrifuge, Dupont, Wilmington, Del.). The primary broth was chilled at 4° C. for 8-16 hours and recentrifuged at least 2 hours (conditions above) to further clarify the broth by removal of a putative mucopolysaccharide which precipitated upon standing. (An alternative processing method combined both steps and involved the use of a 16 hour clarification centrifugation, same conditions as above.) This broth was then stored at 4° C. prior to bioassay or filtration.

[0106] Photorhabdus culture broth and protein toxin(s) purified from this broth showed activity (mortality and/or growth inhibition, reduced adult emergence) against a number of insects. More specifically, the activity is seen against corn rootworm (larvae and adult), Colorado potato beetle, and turf grubs, which are members of the insect order Coleoptera. Other members of the Coleoptera include wireworms, pollen beetles, flea beetles, seed beetles and weevils. Activity has also been observed against aster leafhopper, which is a member of the order, Homoptera. Other members of the Homoptera include planthoppers, pear pyslla, apple sucker, scale insects, whiteflies, and spittle bugs, as well as numerous host specific aphid species. The broth and purified fractions are also active against beet armyworm, cabbage looper, black cutworm, tobacco budworm, European corn borer, corn earworm, and codling moth, which are members of the order Lepidoptera. Other typical members of this order are clothes moth, Indian mealmoth, leaf rollers, cabbage worm, cotton bollworm, bagworm, Eastern tent caterpillar, sod webworm, and fall armyworm. Activity is also seen against fruitfly and mosquito larvae, which are members of the order Diptera. Other members of the order Diptera are pea midge, carrot fly, cabbage root fly, turnip root fly, onion fly, crane fly, house fly, and various mosquito species. Activity is seen against carpenter ant and Argentine ant, which are members of the order that also includes fire ants, oderous house ants, and little black ants.

[0107] The broth/fraction is useful for reducing populations of insects and were used in a method of inhibiting an insect population. The method may comprise applying to a locus of the insect an effective insect inactivating amount of the active described. Results are reported in Table 4.

[0108] Activity against corn rootworm larvae was tested as follows. Photorhabdus culture broth (filter sterilized, cell-free) or purified HPLC fractions were applied directly to the surface (about 1.5 cm2) of 0.25 ml of artificial diet in 30 μl aliquots following dilution in control medium or 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0, respectively. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and the wells were infested with single, neonate Diabrotica undecimpunctata howardi (Southern corn rootworm, SCR) hatched from sterilized eggs, with second instar SCR grown on artificial diet or with second instar Diabrotica virgifera virgifera (Western corn rootworm, WCR) reared on corn seedlings grown in Metromix®. Second instar larvae were weighed prior to addition to the diet. The plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained at 27° C. for the appropriate period (4 days for neonate and adult SCR, 2-5 days for WCR larvae, 7-14 days for second instar SCR). Mortality and weight determinations were scored as indicated. Generally, 16 insects per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortalities were as follows: neonate larvae, <5%, adult beetles, 5%.

[0109] Activity against Colorado potato beetle was tested as follows. Photorhabdus culture broth or control medium was applied to the surface (about 2.0 cm2) of 1.5 ml of standard artificial diet held in the wells of a 24-well tissue culture plate. Each well received 50 μl of treatment and was allowed to air dry. Individual second instar Colorado potato beetle (Leptinotarsa decemlineata, CPB) larvae were then placed onto the diet and mortality was scored after 4 days. Ten larvae per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortality was 3.3%.

[0110] Activity against Japanese beetle grubs and beetles was tested as follows. Turf grubs (Popillia japonica, 2-3rd instar) were collected from infested lawns and maintained in the laboratory in soil/peat mixture with carrot slices added as additional diet. Turf beetles were pheromone-trapped locally and maintained in the laboratory in plastic containers with maple leaves as food. Following application of undiluted Photorhabdus culture broth or control medium to corn rootworm artificial diet (30 μl/1.54 cm2, beetles) or carrot slices (larvae), both stages were placed singly in a diet well and observed for any mortality and feeding. In both cases there was a clear reduction in the amount of feeding (and feces production) observed.

[0111] Activity against mosquito larvae was tested as follows. The assay was conducted in a 96-well microtiter plate. Each well contained 200 μl of aqueous solution (Photorhabdus culture broth, control medium or H2O) and approximately 20, 1-day old larvae (Aedes aegypti). There were 6 wells per treatment. The results were read at 2 hours after infestation and did not change over the three day observation period. No control mortality was seen.

[0112] Activity against fruitflies was tested as follows. Purchased Drosophila melanogaster medium was prepared using 50% dry medium and a 50% liquid of either water, control medium or Photorhabdus culture broth. This was accomplished by placing 8.0 ml of dry medium in each of 3 rearing vials per treatment and adding 8.0 ml of the appropriate liquid. Ten late instar Drosophila melanogaster maggots were then added to each vial. The vials were held on a laboratory bench, at room temperature, under fluorescent ceiling lights. Pupal or adult counts were made after 3, 7 and 10 days of exposure. Incorporation of Photorhabdus culture broth into the diet media for fruitfly maggots caused a slight (17%) but significant reduction in day-10 adult emergence as compared to water and control medium (3% reduction).

[0113] Activity against aster leafhopper was tested as follows. The ingestion assay for aster leafhopper (Macrosteles severini) is designed to allow ingestion of the active without other external contact. The reservoir for the active/“food” solution is made by making 2 holes in the center of the bottom portion of a 35×10 mm Petri dish. A 2 inch Parafilm M® square is placed across the top of the dish and secured with an “O” ring. A 1 oz. plastic cup is then infested with approximately 7 leafhoppers and the reservoir is placed on top of the cup, Parafilm down. The test solution is then added to the reservoir through the holes. In tests using undiluted Photorhabdus culture broth, the broth and control medium were dialyzed against water to reduce control mortality. Mortality is reported at day 2 where 26.5% control mortality was seen. In the tests using purified fractions (200 mg protein/ml) a final concentration of 5% sucrose was used in all treatments to improve survivability of the aster leafhoppers. The assay was held in an incubator at 28° C., 70% RH with a 16/8 photoperiod. The assay was graded for mortality at 72 hours. Control mortality was 5.5%.

[0114] Activity against Argentine ants was tested as follows. A 1.5 ml aliquot of 100% Photorhabdus culture broth, control medium or water was pipetted into 2.0 ml clear glass vials. The vials were plugged with a piece of cotton dental wick that was moistened with the appropriate treatment. Each vial was placed into a separate 60×16 mm Petri dish with 8 to 12 adult Argentine ants (Linepithema humile). There were three replicates per treatment. Bioassay plates were held on a laboratory bench, at room temperature under fluorescent ceiling lights. Mortality readings were made after 5 days of exposure. Control mortality was 24%.

[0115] Activity against carpenter ant was tested as follows. Black carpenter ant workers (Camponotus pennsylvanicus) were collected from trees on DowElanco property in Indianapolis, Ind. Tests with Photorhabdus culture broth were performed as follows. Each plastic bioassay container (7⅛″×3″) held fifteen workers, a paper harborage and 10 ml of broth or control media in a plastic shot glass. A cotton wick delivered the treatment to the ants through a hole in the shot glass lid. All treatments contained 5% sucrose. Bioassays were held in the dark at room temperature and graded at 19 days. Control mortality was 9%. Assays delivering purified fractions utilized artificial ant diet mixed with the treatment (purified fraction or control solution) at a rate of 0.2 ml treatment/2.0 g diet in a plastic test tube. The final protein concentration of the purified fraction was less than 10 μg/g diet. Ten ants per treatment, a water source, harborage and the treated diet were placed in sealed plastic containers and maintained in the dark at 27° C. in a humidified incubator. Mortality was scored at day 10. No control mortality was seen.

[0116] Activity against various lepidopteran larvae was tested as follows. Photorhabdus culture broth or purified fractions were applied directly to the surface (about 1.5 cm2) of 0.25 ml of standard artificial diet in 30 μl aliquots following dilution in control medium or 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0, respectively. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and the wells were infested with single, neonate larva. European corn borer (Ostrinia nubilalis) and corn earworm (Helicoverpa zea) eggs were supplied from commercial sources and hatched in-house, whereas beet armyworm (Spodoptera exigua), cabbage looper (Trichoplusia ni), tobacco budworm (Heliothis virescens), codling moth (Laspeyresia pomonella) and black cutworm (Agrotis epsilon) larvae were supplied internally. Following infestation with larvae, the diet plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained in the dark at 27° C. for the appropriate period. Mortality and weight determinations were scored at days 5-7 for Photorhabdus culture broth and days 4-7 for the purified fraction. Generally, 16 insects per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortality ranged from 4-12.5% for control medium and was less than 10% for phosphate buffer.

TABLE 4
Effect of Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14)
Culture Broth and Purified Toxin Fraction on Mortality and Growth
Inhibition of Different Insect Orders/Species
	Broth	Purified Fraction
Insect Order/Species	% Mort.	% G.I.	% Mort.	% G.I.
COLEOPTERA
Corn Rootworm
Southern/neonate larva	100	na	100	na
Southern/2nd instar	na	38.5	nt	nt
Southern/adult	45	nt	nt	nt
Western/2nd instar	na	35	nt	nt
Colorado Potato Beetle	93	nt	nt	nt
2nd instar
Turf Grub	na	a.f.	nt	nt
3rd instar	na	a.f.	nt	nt
adult
DIPTERA
Fruit Fly (adult emergence)	17	nt	nt	nt
Mosquito larvae	100	na	nt	nt
HOMOPTERA
Aster Leafhopper	96.5	na	100	na
HYMENOPTERA
Argentine Ant	75	na	nt	na
Carpenter Ant	71	na	100	na
LEPIDOPTERA
Beet Armyworm	12.5	36	18.75	41.4
Black Cutworm	nt	nt	0	71.2
Cabbage Looper	nt	nt	21.9	66.8
Codling Moth	nt	nt	6.25	45.9
Corn Earworm	56.3	94.2	97.9	na
European Corn Borer	96.7	98.4	100	na
Tobacco Budworm	13.5	52.5	19.4	85.6
Mort. = mortality,
G.I. = growth inhibition,
na = not applicable,
nt = not tested,
a.f. = anti-feedant

EXAMPLE 3

Insecticide Utility upon Soil Application

[0117] Photorhabdus luminescens (strain W-14) culture broth was shown to be active against corn rootworm when applied directly to soil or a soil-mix (Metromix®). Activity against neonate SCR and WCR in Metromix® was tested as follows (Table 5). The test was run using corn seedlings (United Agriseeds brand CL614) that were germinated in the light on moist filter paper for 6 days. After roots were approximately 3-6 cm long, a single kernel/seedling was planted in a 591 ml clear plastic cup with 50 gm of dry Metromix®. Twenty neonate SCR or WCR were then placed directly on the roots of the seedling and covered with Metromix®. Upon infestation, the seedlings were then drenched with 50 ml total volume of a diluted broth solution. After drenching, the cups were sealed and left at room temperature in the light for 7 days. Afterwards, the seedlings were washed to remove all Metromix® and the roots were excised and weighed. Activity was rated as the percentage of corn root remaining relative to the control plants and as leaf damage induced by feeding. Leaf damage was scored visually and rated as either −, +, ++, or +++, with − representing no damage and +++ representing severe damage.

[0118] Activity against neonate SCR in soil was tested as follows (Table 6). The test was run using corn seedlings (United Agriseeds brand CL614) that were germinated in the light on moist filter paper for 6 days. After the roots were approximately 3-6 cm long, a single kernel/seedling was planted in a 591 ml clear plastic cup with 150 gm of soil from a field in Lebanon, Ind. planted the previous year with corn. This soil had not been previously treated with insecticides. Twenty neonate SCR were then placed directly on the roots of the seedling and covered with soil. After infestation, the seedlings were drenched with 50 ml total volume of a diluted broth solution. After drenching, the unsealed cups were incubated in a high relative humidity chamber (80%) at 78° F. Afterwards, the seedlings were washed to remove all soil and the roots were excised and weighed. Activity was rated as the percentage of corn root remaining relative to the control plants and as leaf damage induced by feeding. Leaf damage was scored visually and rated as either −, +, ++, or +++, with − representing no damage and +++ representing severe damage.

TABLE 5
Effect of Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14) Culture Broth on
Rootworm Larvae after Post-Infestation Drenching (Metromix ®)
Treatment	Larvae	Leaf Damage	Root Weight (g)	%
Southern Corn
Rootworm
Water	−	−	0.4916 ± 0.023	100
Medium (2.0% v/v)	−	−	0.4416 ± 0.029	100
Broth (6.25% v/v)	−	−	0.4641 ± 0.081	100
Water	+	+++	0.1410 ± 0.006	28.7
Media (2.0% v/v)	+	+++	0.1345 ± 0.028	30.4
Broth (1.56% v/v)	+	−	0.4830 ± 0.031	104
Western Corn
Rootworm
Water	−	−	0.4446 ± 0.019	100
Broth (2.0% v/v)	−	−	0.4069 ± 0.026	100
Water	+	−	0.2202 ± 0.015	49
Broth (2.0% v/v)	+	−	0.3879 ± 0.013	95

[0119]

TABLE 6
Effect of Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14) Culture Broth on
Southern Corn Rootworm Larvae after Post-Infestation Drenching
(Soil)
Treatment	Larvae	Leaf Damage	Root Weight(g)	%
Water	−	−	0.2148 ± 0.014	100
Broth (50% v/v)	−	−	0.2260 ± 0.016	103
Water	+	+++	0.0916 ± 0.009	43
Broth (50% v/v)	+	−	0.2428 ± 0.032	113

[0120] Activity of Photorhabdus luminescens (strain W-14) culture broth against second instar turf grubs in Metromix® was observed in tests conducted as follows (Table 7) - Approximately 50 gm of dry Metromix® was added to a 591 ml clear plastic cup. The Metromix® was then drenched with 50 ml total volume of a 50% (v/v) diluted Photorhabdus broth solution. The dilution of crude broth was made with water, with 50% broth being prepared by adding 25 ml of crude broth to 25 ml of water for 50 ml total volume. A 1% (w/v) solution of proteose peptone #3 (PP3), which is a 50% dilution of the normal media concentration, was used as a broth control. After drenching, five second instar turf grubs were placed on the top of the moistened Metromix®. Healthy turf grub larvae burrowed rapidly into the Metromix®. Those larvae that did not burrow within 1 h were removed and replaced with fresh larvae. The cups were sealed and placed in a 28° C. incubator, in the dark. After seven days, larvae were removed from the Metromix® and scored for mortality. Activity was rated the percentage of mortality relative to control.

TABLE 7
Effect of Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14) Culture Broth on
Turf Grub after Pre-Infestation Drenching (Metromix ®)
	Treatment	Mortality*	Mortality %
	Water	7/15	47
	Control medium	12/19	63
	(1.0% w/v)
	Broth	17/20	85
	(50% v/v)
	*expressed as a ratio of dead/living larvae

EXAMPLE 4

Insecticide Utility Upon Leaf Application

[0121] Activity of Photorhabdus broth against European corn borer was seen when the broth was applied directly to the surface of maize leaves (Table 8). In these assays Photorhabdus broth was diluted 100-fold with culture medium and applied manually to the surface of excised maize leaves at a rate of about 6.0 μl/cm2 of leaf surface. The leaves were air dried and cut into equal sized strips approximately 2×2 inches. The leaves were rolled, secured with paper clips and placed in 1 oz plastic shot glasses with 0.25 inch of 2% agar on the bottom surface to provide moisture. Twelve neonate European corn borers were then placed onto the rolled leaf and the cup was sealed. After incubation for 5 days at 27° C. in the dark, the samples were scored for feeding damage and recovered larvae.

TABLE 8
Effect of Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14) Culture Broth on
European Corn Borer Larvae Following Pre-Infestation Application to
Excised Maize Leaves
Treatment	Leaf Damage	Larvae Recovered	Weight (mg)
Water	Extensive	55/120	0.42 mg
Control Medium	Extensive	40/120	0.50 mg
Broth (1.0% v/v)	Trace	3/120	0.15 mg

[0122] Activity of the culture broth against neonate tobacco budworm (Heliothis virescens) was demonstrated using a leaf dip methodology. Fresh cotton leaves were excised from the plant and leaf disks were cut with an 18.5 mm cork-borer. The disks were individually emersed in control medium (PP3) or Photorhabdus luminescens (strain W-14) culture broth which had been concentrated approximately 10-fold using an Amicon (Beverly, Mass.), Proflux M12 tangential filtration system with a 10 kDa filter. Excess liquid was removed and a straightened paper clip was placed through the center of the disk. The paper clip was then wedged into a plastic, 1.0 oz shot glass containing approximately 2.0 ml of 1% Agar. This served to suspend the leaf disk above the agar. Following drying of the leaf disk, a single neonate tobacco budworm larva was placed on the disk and the cup was capped. The cups were then sealed in a plastic bag and placed in a darkened, 27° C. incubator for 5 days. At this time the remaining larvae and leaf material were weighed to establish a measure of leaf damage (Table 9).

TABLE 9
Effect of Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14) Culture Broth on
Tobacco Budworm Neonates in a Cotton-Leaf Dip Assay
			Final Weights (mg)
	Treatment	Leaf Disk	Larvae
	Control leaves	55.7 ± 1.3	na*
	Control Medium	34.0 ± 2.9	4.3 ± 0.91
	Photorhabdus broth	54.3 ± 1.4	0.0**
	*not applicable,
	**no live larvae found

EXAMPLE 5, Part A

Characterization of Toxin Peptide Components

[0123] In a subsequent analysis, the toxin protein subunits of the bands isolated as in Example 1 were resolved on a 7% SDS polyacrylamide electrophoresis gel with a ratio of 30:0.8 (acrylamide:BIS-acrylamide). This gel matrix facilitates better resolution of the larger proteins. The gel system used to estimate the Band 1 and Band 2 subunit molecular weights in Example 1 was an 18% gel with a ratio of 38:0.18 (acrylamide:BIS-acrylamide), which allowed for a broader range of size separation, but less resolution of higher molecular weight components.

[0124] In this analysis, 10, rather than 8, protein bands were resolved. Table 10 reports the calculated molecular weights of the 10 resolved bands, and directly compares the molecular weights estimated under these conditions to those of the prior example. It is not surprising that additional bands were detected under the different separation conditions used in this example. Variations between the prior and new estimates of molecular weight are also to be expected given the differences in analytical conditions. In the analysis of this example, it is thought that the higher molecular weight estimates are more accurate than in Example 1, as a result of improved resolution. However, these are estimates based on SDS PAGE analysis, which are typically not analytically precise and result in estimates of peptides and which may have been further altered due to post- and co-translational modifications.

[0125] Amino acid sequences were determined for the N-terminal portions of five of the 10 resolved peptides. Table 10 + correlates the molecular weight of the proteins and the identified sequences. In SEQ ID No:2, certain analyses suggest that the proline at residue 5 may be an asparagine (asn). In SEQ ID NO:3, certain analyses suggest that the amino acid residues at positions 13 and 14 are both arginine (arg). In SEQ ID NO:4, certain analyses suggest that the amino acid residue at position 6 may be either alanine (ala) or serine (ser). In SEQ ID NO:5, certain analyses suggest that the amino acid residue at position 3 may be aspartic acid (asp).

TABLE 10
ESTIMATE	NEW ESTIMATE*	SEQ. LISTING
208	200.2 kDa	SEQ ID NO: 1
184	175.0 kDa	SEQ ID NO: 2
65.6	68.1 kDa	SEQ ID NO: 3
60.8	65.1 kDa	SEQ ID NO: 4
56.2	58.3 kDa	SEQ ID NO: 5
25.1	23.2 kDa	SEQ ID NO: 15
*New estimates are based on SDS PAGE and are not based on gene sequences. SDS PAGE is not analytically precise.

EXAMPLE 5, Part B

Characterization of Toxin Peptide Components

[0126] New N-terminal sequence, SEQ ID NO:15, Ala Gln Asp Gly Asn Gln Asp Thr Phe Phe Ser Gly Asn Thr, was obtained by further N-terminal sequencing of peptides isolated from Native HPLC-purified toxin as described in Example 5, Part A, above. This peptide comes from the tcaA gene. The peptide labeled TcaAii, starts at position 254 and goes to position 491, where the TcaAiii peptide starts, SEQ ID NO:4. The estimated size of the peptide based on the gene sequence is 25,240 Da.

EXAMPLE 6

Characterization of Toxin Peptide Components

[0127] In yet another analysis, the toxin protein complex was re-isolated from the Photorhabdus luminescens growth medium (after culture without Tween) by performing a 10%-80% ammonium sulfate precipitation followed by an ion exchange chromatography step (Mono Q) and two molecular sizing chromatography steps. These conditions were like those used in Example 1. During the first molecular sizing step, a second biologically active peak was found at about 100±10 kDa. Based upon protein measurements, this fraction was 20-50 fold less active than the larger, or primary, active peak of about 860±100 kDa (native). During this isolation experiment, a smaller active peak of about 325±50 kDa that retained a considerable portion of the starting biological activity was also resolved. It is thought that the 325 kDa peak is related to or derived from the 860 kDa peak.

[0128] A 56 kDa protein was resolved in this analysis. The N-terminal sequence of this protein is presented in SEQ ID NO:6. It is noteworthy that this protein shares significant identity and conservation with SEQ ID NO:5 at the N-terminus, suggesting that the two may be encoded by separate members of a gene family and that the proteins produced by each gene are sufficiently similar to both be operable in the insecticidal toxin complex.

[0129] A second, prominent 185 kDa protein was consistently present in amounts comparable to that of protein 3 from Table 10, and may be the same protein or protein fragment. The N-terminal sequence of this 185 kDa protein is shown at SEQ ID NO:7.

[0130] Additional N-terminal amino acid sequence data were also obtained from isolated proteins. None of the determined N-terminal sequences appear identical to a protein identified in Table 10. Other proteins were present in isolated preparation. One such protein has an estimated molecular weight of 108 kDa and an N-terminal terminal sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:8. A second such protein has an estimated molecular weight of 80 kDa and an N-terminal sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:9.

[0131] When the protein material in the approximately 325 kDa active peak was analyzed by size, bands of approximately 51, 31, 28, and 22 kDa were observed. As in all cases in which a molecular weight was determined by analysis of electrophoretic mobility, these molecular weights were subject to error effects introduced by buffer ionic strength differences, electrophoresis power differences, and the like. One of ordinary skill would understand that definitive molecular weight values cannot be determined using these standard methods and that each was subject to variation. It was hypothesized that proteins of these sizes are degradation products of the larger protein species (of approximately 200 kDa size) that were observed in the larger primary toxin complex.

[0132] Finally, several preparations included a protein having the N-terminal sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:10. This sequence was strongly homologous to known chaperonin proteins, accessory proteins known to function in the assembly of large protein complexes. Although the applicants could not ascribe such an assembly function to the protein identified in SEQ ID NO:10, it was consistent with the existence of the described toxin protein complex that such a chaperonin protein could be involved in its assembly. Moreover, although such proteins have not directly been suggested to have toxic activity, this protein may be important to determining the overall structural nature of the protein toxin, and thus, may contribute to the toxic activity or durability of the complex in vivo after oral delivery.

[0133] Subsequent analysis of the stability of the protein toxin complex to proteinase K was undertaken. It was determined that after 24 hour incubation of the complex in the presence of a 10-fold molar excess of proteinase K, activity was virtually eliminated (mortality on oral application dropped to about 5%). These data confirm the proteinaceous nature of the toxin.

[0134] The toxic activity was also retained by a dialysis membrane, again confirming the large size of the native toxin complex.

EXAMPLE 7

Isolation, Characterization and Partial Amino Acid Sequencing of Photorhabdus Toxins

[0135] Isolation and N-Terminal Amino Acid Sequencing

[0136] In a set of experiments conducted in parallel to Examples 5 and 6, ammonium sulfate precipitation of Photorhabdus proteins was performed by adjusting Photorhabdus broth, typically 2-3 liters, to a final concentration of either 10% or 20% by the slow addition of ammonium sulfate crystals. After stirring for 1 hour at 4° C., the material was centrifuged at 12,000×g for 30 minutes. The supernatant was adjusted to 80% ammonium sulfate, stirred at 4° C. for 1 hour, and centrifuged at 12,000×g for 60 minutes. The pellet was resuspended in one-tenth the volume of 10 mM Na2.PO4, pH 7.0 and dialyzed against the same phosphate buffer overnight at 4° C. The dialyzed material was centrifuged at 12,000×g for 1 hour prior to ion exchange chromatography.

[0137] A HR 16/50 Q Sepharose (Pharmacia) anion exchange column was equilibrated with 10 mM Na2.PO4, pH 7.0. Centrifuged, dialyzed ammonium sulfate pellet was applied to the Q Sepharose column at a rate of 1.5 ml/min and washed extensively at 3.0 ml/min with equilibration buffer until the optical density (O.D. 280) reached less than 0.100. Next, either a 60 minute NaCl gradient ranging from 0 to 0.5 M at 3 ml/min, or a series of step elutions using 0.1 M, 0.4 M and finally 1.0 NaCl for 60 minutes each was applied to the column. Fractions were pooled and concentrated using a Centriprep 100. Alternatively, proteins could be eluted by a single 0.4 M NaCl wash without prior elution with 0.1 M NaCl.

[0138] Two milliliter aliquots of concentrated Q Sepharose samples were loaded at 0.5 ml/min onto a HR 16/50 Superose 12 (Pharmacia) gel filtration column equilibrated with 10 mM Na2.PO4, pH 7.0. The column was washed with the same buffer for 240 min at 0.5 ml/min and 2 min samples were collected. The void volume material was collected and concentrated using a Centriprep 100. Two milliliter aliquots of concentrated Superose 12 samples were loaded at 0.5 ml/min onto a HR 16/50 Sepharose 4B-CL (Pharmacia) gel filtration column equilibrated with 10 mM Na2.PO4, pH 7.0. The column was washed with the same buffer for 240 min at 0.5 ml/min and 2 min samples were collected.

[0139] The excluded protein peak was subjected to a second fractionation by application to a gel filtration column that used a Sepharose CL-4B resin, which separates proteins ranging from about 30 kDa to 1000 kDa. This fraction was resolved into two peaks; a minor peak at the void volume (>1000 kDa) and a major peak which eluted at an apparent molecular weight of about 860 kDa. Over a one week period subsequent samples subjected to gel filtration showed the gradual appearance of a third peak (approximately 325 kDa) that seemed to arise from the major peak, perhaps by limited proteolysis. Bioassays performed on the three peaks showed that the void peak had no activity, while the 860 kDa toxin complex fraction was highly active, and the 325 kDa peak was less active, although quite potent. SDS PAGE analysis of Sepharose CL-4B toxin complex peaks from different fermentation productions revealer two distinct peptide patterns, denoted “P” and “S”. The two patterns had marked differences in the molecular weights and concentrations of peptide components in their fractions. The “S” pattern, produced most frequently, had 4 high molecular weight peptides (>150 kDa) while the “P” pattern had 3 high molecular weight peptides. In addition, the “S” peptide fraction was found to have 2-3 fold more activity against European Corn Borer. This shift may be related to variations in protein expression due to age of inoculum and/or other factors based on growth parameters of aged cultures.

[0140] Milligram quantities of peak toxin complex fractions determined to be “P” or “S” peptide patterns were subjected to preparative SDS PAGE, and transblotted with TRIS-glycine (Seprabuff™ to PVDF membranes (ProBlott™, Applied Biosystems) for 3-4 hours. Blots were sent for amino acid analysis and N-terminal amino acid sequencing at Harvard MicroChem and Cambridge ProChem, respectively. Three peptides in the “S” pattern had unique N-terminal amino acid sequences compared to the sequences identified in the previous example. A 201 kDa (TcdAii) peptide set forth as SEQ ID NO:13 below shared between 33% amino acid identity and 50% similarity (similarity and identity were calculated by hand) with SEQ ID NO:1 (TcbAii) (in Table 10 vertical lines denote amino acid identities and colons indicate conservative amino acid substitutions). A second peptide of 197 kDa, SEQ ID NO:14 (TcdB), had 42% identity and 58% similarity with SEQ ID NO:2 (TcaC) (similarity and identity were calculated by hand). Yet a third peptide of 205 kDa was denoted TcdAii. In addition, a limited N-terminal amino acid sequence, SEQ ID NO:16 (TcbA), of a peptide of at least 235 kDa was identical with the amino acid sequence, SEQ ID NO:12, deduced from a cloned gene (tcbA), SEQ ID NO:11, containing a deduced amino acid sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:1 (TcbAii). This indicates that the larger 235+ kDa peptide was proteolytically processed to the 201 kDa peptide, (TcbAii), (SEQ ID NO:1) during fermentation, possibly resulting in activation of the molecule. In yet another sequence, the sequence originally reported as SEQ ID NO:5 (TcaBii) reported in Example 5 above, was found to contain an aspartic acid residue (Asp) at the third position rather than glycine (Gly) and two additional amino acids Gly and Asp at the eighth and ninth positions, respectively. In yet two other sequences, SEQ ID NO:2 (TcaC) and SEQ ID NO:3 (TcaBi), additional amino acid sequence was obtained. Densitometric quantitation was performed using a sample that was identical to the “S” preparation sent for N-terminal analysis. This analysis showed that the 201 kDa and 197 kDa peptides represent 7.0% and 7.2%, respectively, of the total Coomassie brillant blue stained protein in the “S” pattern and are present in amounts similar to the other abundant peptides. It was speculated that these peptides may represent protein homologs, analogous to the situation found with other bacterial toxins, such as various CryI Bt toxins. These proteins vary from 40-90% similarity at their N-terminal amino acid sequence, which encompasses the toxic fragment.

[0141] Internal Amino Acid Sequencing

[0142] To facilitate cloning of toxin peptide genes, internal amino acid sequences of selected peptides were obtained as followed. Milligram quantities of peak 2A fractions determined to be “P” or “S” peptide patterns were subjected to preparative SDS PAGE, and transblotted with TRIS-glycine (Seprabuff™ to PVDF membranes (ProBlott™, Applied Biosystems) for 3-4 hours. Blots were sent for amino acid analysis and N-terminal amino acid sequencing at Harvard MicroChem and Cambridge ProChem, respectively. Three peptides, referred to as TcbAii (containing SEQ ID NO:1), TcdAii, and TcaBi (containing SEQ ID NO:3) were subjected to trypsin digestion by Harvard MicroChem followed by HPLC chromatography to separate individual peptides. N-terminal amino acid analysis was performed on selected tryptic peptide fragments. Two internal peptides were sequenced for the peptide TcdAii (205 kDa peptide) referred to as TcdAii-PT111 (SEQ ID NO:17) and TcdAii-PT79 (SEQ ID NO:18). Two internal peptides were sequenced for the peptide TcaBi (68 kDa peptide) referred to as TcaBi-PT158 (SEQ ID NO:19) and TcaBi-PT108 (SEQ ID NO:20). Four internal peptides were sequenced for the peptide TcbAii (201 kDa peptide) referred to as TcbAii-PT103 (SEQ ID NO:21), TcbAii-PT56 (SEQ ID NO:22), TcbAii-PT81(a) (SEQ ID NO:23), and TcbAii-PT81(b) (SEQ ID NO:24).

TABLE 11
N-Terminal Amino Acid Sequences
(similarity and identity were calculated by hand)
201 kDa (33% identity & 50% similarity to SEQ ID
NO.1)
L I G Y N N Q F S G * A        SEQ ID NO:13
:   | |       | :     |
F I Q G Y S D L F G N - A      SEQ ID NO:1
197 kDa (42% identity & 58% similarity SEQ ID NO.2)
M Q N S Q T F +E,INS S V G E L SEQ ID NO.14
| | : |       | : :   |
M Q D S P E V S I T T L        SEQ ID NO.2

EXAMPLE 8

Construction of a Cosmid Library of Photorhabdus luminescens W-14 Genomic DNA and its Screening to Isolate Genes Encoding Peptides Comprising the Toxic Protein Preparation

[0143] As a prerequisite for the production of Photorhabdus insect toxic proteins in heterologous hosts, and for other uses, it is necessary to isolate and characterize the genes that encode those peptides. This objective was pursued in parallel. One approach, described later, was based on the use of monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies raised against the purified toxin which were then used to isolate clones from an expression library. The other approach, described in this example, is based on the use of the N-terminal and internal amino acid sequence data to design degenerate oligonucleotides for use in PCR amplication. Either method can be used to identify DNA clones that contain the peptide-encoding genes so as to permit the isolation of the respective genes, and the determination of their DNA base sequence.

[0144] Genomic DNA Isolation

[0145] Photorhabdus luminescens strain W-14 (ATCC accession number 55397) was grown on 2% proteose peptone #3 agar (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) and insecticidal toxin competence was maintained by repeated bioassay after passage, using the method described in Example 1 above. A 50 ml shake culture was produced in a 175 ml baffled flask in 2% proteose peptone #3 medium, grown at 28° C. and 150 rpm for approximately 24 hours. 15 ml of this culture was pelleted and frozen in its medium at −20° C. until it was thawed for DNA isolation. The thawed culture was centrifuged, (700×g, 30 min) and the floating orange mucopolysaccharide material was removed. The remaining cell material was centrifuged (25,000×g, 15 min) to pellet the bacterial cells, and the medium was removed and discarded.

[0146] Genomic DNA was isolated by an adaptation of the CTAB method described in section 2.4.1 of Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (Ausubel et al. eds, John Wiley & Sons, 1994) [modified to include a salt shock and with all volumes increased 10-fold]. The pelleted bacterial cells were resuspended in TE buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 8.0) to a final volume of 10 ml, then 12 ml of 5 M NaCl was added; this mixture was centrifuged 20 min at 15,000×g. The pellet was resuspended in 5.7 ml TE and 300 ml of 10% SDS and 60 ml of 20 mg/ml proteinase K (Gibco BRL Products, Grand Island, N.Y.; in sterile distilled water) were added to the suspension. This mixture was incubated at 37° C. for 1 hr; then approximately 10 mg lysozyme (Worthington Biochemical Corp., Freehold, N.J.) was added. After an additional 45 min, 1 ml of 5 M NaCl and 800 ml of CTAB/NaCl solution (10% w/v CTAB, 0.7 M NaCl) were added. This preparation was incubated 10 min at 65° C., then gently agitated and further incubated and agitated for approximately 20 min to assist clearing of the cellular material. An equal volume of chloroform/isoamyl alcohol solution (24:1, v/v) was added, mixed gently and centrifuged. After two extractions with an equal volume of PCI (phenol/chloroform/isoamyl alcohol; 50:49:1, v/v/v; equilibrated with 1 M Tris-HCl, pH 8.0; Intermountain Scientific Corporation, Kaysville, Utah), the DNA was precipitated with 0.6 volume of isopropanol. The DNA precipitate was gently removed with a glass rod, washed twice with 70% ethanol, dried, and dissolved in 2 ml STE (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.0, 10 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA). This preparation contained 2.5 mg/ml DNA, as determined by optical density at 260 nm (i.e., OD260).

[0147] The molecular size range of the isolated genomic DNA was evaluated for suitability for library construction. CHEF gel analysis was performed in 1.5% agarose (Seakem® LE, FMC BioProducts, Rockland, Me.) gels with 0.5×TBE buffer (44.5 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.0, 44.5 mM H3BO3, 1 mM EDTA) on a BioRad CHEF-DR II apparatus with a Pulsewave 760 Switcher (Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc., Richmond, Calif.). The running parameters were: initial A time, 3 sec; final A time, 12 sec; 200 volts; running temperature, 4-18° C.; run time, 16.5 hr. Ethidium bromide staining and examination of the gel under ultraviolet light indicated the DNA ranged from 30-250 kbp in size.

[0148] Construction of Library

[0149] A partial Sau3A 1 digest was made of this Photorhabdus genomic DNA preparation. The method was based on section 3.1.3 of Ausubel (supra.). Adaptions included running smaller scale reactions under various conditions until nearly optimal results were achieved. Several scaled-up large reactions with varied conditions were run, the results analyzed on CHEF gels, and only the best large scale preparation was carried forward. In the optimal case, 200 μg of Photorhabdus genomic DNA was incubated with 1.5 units of Sau3A 1 (New England Biolabs, “NEB”, Beverly, Mass.) for 15 min at 37° C. in 2 ml total volume of 1×NEB 4 buffer (supplied as 10× by the manufacturer). The reaction was stopped by adding 2 ml of PCI and centrifuging at 8000×g for 10 min. To the supernatant were added 200 μl of 5 M NaCl plus 6 ml of ice-cold ethanol. This preparation was chilled for 30 min at −20° C., then centrifuged at 12,000×g for 15 min. The supernatant was removed and the precipitate was dried in a vacuum oven at 40° C., then resuspended in 400 μl STE. Spectrophotometric assay indicated about 40% recovery of the input DNA. The digested DNA was size fractionated on a sucrose gradient according to section 5.3.2 of CPMB (op. cit.). A 10% to 40% (w/v) linear sucrose gradient was prepared with a gradient maker in Ultra-Clear™ tubes (Beckman Instruments, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.) and the DNA sample was layered on top. After centrifugation, (26,000 rpm, 17 hr, Beckman SW41 rotor, 20° C.), fractions (about 750 μl) were drawn from the top of the gradient and analyzed by CHEF gel electrophoresis (as described earlier). Fractions containing Sau3A 1 fragments in the size range 20-40 kbp were selected and DNA was precipitated by a modification (amounts of all solutions increased approximately 6.3-fold) of the method in section 5.3.3 of Ausubel (supra.). After overnight precipitation, the DNA was collected by centrifugation (17,000×g, 15 min), dried, redissolved in TE, pooled into a final volume of 80 μl, and reprecipitated with the addition of 8 μl 3 M sodium acetate and 220 μl ethanol. The pellet collected by centrifugation as above was resuspended in 12 μl TE. Concentration of the DNA was determined by Hoechst 33258 dye (Polysciences, Inc., Warrington, Pa.) fluorometry in a Hoefer TKO100 fluorimeter (Hoefer Scientific Instruments, San Francisco, Calif.). Approximately 2.5 μg of the size-fractionated DNA was recovered.

[0150] Thirty μg of cosmid pWE15 DNA (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) was digested to completion with 100 units of restriction enzyme BamH 1 (NEB) in the manufacturer's buffer (final volume of 200 μl, 37° C., 1 hr). The reaction was extracted with 100 μl of PCI and DNA was precipitated from the aqueous phase by addition of 20 μl 3M sodium acetate and 550 μl-20° C. absolute ethanol. After 20 min at −70° C., the DNA was collected by centrifugation (17,000×g, 15 min), dried under vacuum, and dissolved in 180 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0. To this were added 20 μl of 10×CIP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3; 10 mM ZnCl2; 10 mM MgCl2), and 1 μl (0.25 units) of 1:4 diluted calf intestinal alkaline phosphatase (Boehringer Mannheim Corporation, Indianapolis, Ind.). After 30 min at 37° C., the following additions were made: 2 μl 0.5 M EDTA, pH 8.0; 10 μl 10% SDS; 0.5 μl of 20 mg/ml proteinase K (as above), followed by incubation at 55° C. for 30 min. Following sequential extractions with 100 μl of PCI and 100 μl phenol (Intermountain Scientific Corporation, equilibrated with 1 M Tris-HCl, pH 8.0), the dephosphorylated DNA was precipitated by addition of 72 μl of 7.5 M ammonium acetate and 550 μl-20° C. ethanol, incubation on ice for 30 min, and centrifugation as above. The pelleted DNA was washed once with 500 μl-20° C. 70% ethanol, dried under vacuum, and dissolved in 20 μl of TE buffer.

[0151] Ligation of the size-fractionated Sau3A 1 fragments to the BamH 1-digested and phosphatased pWE15 vector was accomplished using T4 ligase (NEB) by a modification (i.e., use of premixed 10×ligation buffer supplied by the manufacturer) of the protocol in section 3.33 of Ausubel. Ligation was carried out overnight in a total volume of 20 μl at 15° C., followed by storage at −20° C.

[0152] Four μl of the cosmid DNA ligation reaction, containing about 1 μg of DNA, was packaged into bacteriophage lambda using a commercial packaging extract (Gigapack® III Gold Packaging Extract, Stratagene), following the manufacturer's directions. The packaged preparation was stored at 4° C. until use. The packaged cosmid preparation was used to infect Escherichia coli XL1 Blue MR cells (Stratagene) according to the Gigapack® III Gold protocols (“Titering the Cosmid Library”), as follows. XL1 Blue MR cells were grown in LB medium (g/L: Bacto-tryptone, 10; Bacto-yeast extract, 5; Bacto-agar, 15; NaCl, 5; [Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.]) containing 0.2% (w/v) maltose plus 10 mM MgSO4, at 37° C. After 5 hr growth, cells were pelleted at 700×g (15 min) and resuspended in 6 ml of 10 mM MgSO4. The culture density was adjusted with 10 mM MgSO4 to OD600=0.5. The packaged cosmid library was diluted 1:10 or 1:20 with sterile SM medium (0.1 M NaCl, 10 mM MgSO4, 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.01% w/v gelatin), and 25 μl of the diluted preparation was mixed with 25 μl of the diluted XL1 Blue MR cells. The mixture was incubated at 25° C. for 30 min (without shaking), then 200 μl of LB broth was added, and incubation was continued for approximately 1 hr with occasional gentle shaking. Aliquots (20-40 μl) of this culture were spread on LB agar plates containing 100 mg/l ampicillin (i.e., LB-Amp100) and incubated overnight at 37° C. To store the library without amplification, single colonies were picked and inoculated into individual wells of sterile 96-well microwell plates; each well containing 75 μl of Terrific Broth (TB media: 12 g/l Bacto-tryptone, 24 g/l Bacto-yeast extract, 0.4% v/v glycerol, 17 mM KH2PO4, 72 mM K2HPO4) plus 100 mg/l ampicillin (i.e., TB-Amp100) and incubated (without shaking) overnight at 37° C. After replicating the 96-well plate into a copy plate, 75 μl/well of filter-sterilized TB:glycerol (1:1, v/v; with, or without, 100 mg/l ampicillin) was added to the plate, it was shaken briefly at 100 rpm, 37° C., and then closed with Parafilm® (American National Can, Greenwich, Conn.) and placed in a −70° C. freezer for storage. Copy plates were grown and processed identically to the master plates. A total of 40 such master plates (and their copies) were prepared.

[0153] Screening of the Library with Radiolabeled DNA Probes

[0154] To prepare colony filters for probing with radioactively labeled probes, ten 96-well plates of the library were thawed at 25° C. (bench top at room temperature). A replica plating tool with 96 prongs was used to inoculate a fresh 96-well copy plate containing 75 μl/well of TB-Amp100. The copy plate was grown overnight (stationary) at 37° C., then shaken about 30 min at 100 rpm at 37° C. A total of 800 colonies was represented in these copy plates, due to nongrowth of some isolates. The replica tool was used to inoculate duplicate impressions of the 96-well arrays onto Magna NT (MSI, Westboro, Mass.) nylon membranes (0.45 micron, 220×250 mm) which had been placed on solid LB-Amp100 (100 ml/dish) in Bio-assay plastic dishes (Nunc, 243×243×18 mm; Curtin Mathison Scientific, Inc., Wood Dale, Ill.). The colonies were grown on the membranes at 37° C. for about 3 hr.

[0155] A positive control colony (a bacterial clone containing a GZ4 sequence insert, see below) was grown on a separate Magna NT membrane (Nunc, 0.45 micron, 82 mm circle) on LB medium supplemented with 35 mg/l chloramphenicol (i.e., LB-Cam35), and processed alongside the library colony membranes. Bacterial colonies on the membranes were lysed, and the DNA was denatured and neutralized according to a protocol taken from the Genius™ System User's Guide version 2.0 (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.). Membranes were placed colony side up on filter paper soaked with 0.5 N NaOH plus 1.5 M NaCl for 15 min to denature, and neutralized on filter paper soaked with 1 M Tris-HCl pH 8.0, 1.5 M NaCl for 15 min. After UV-crosslinking using a Stratagene UV Stratalinker set on auto crosslink, the membranes were stored dry at 25° C. until use. Membranes were trimmed into strips containing the duplicate impressions of a single 96-well plate, then washed extensively by the method of section 6.4.1 in CPMB (op. cit.): 3 hr at 25° C. in 3×SSC, 0.1% (w/v) SDS, followed by 1 hr at 65° C. in the same solution, then rinsed in 2×SSC in preparation for the hybridization step (20×SSC=3 M NaCl, 0.3 M sodium citrate, pH 7.0).

[0156] Amplification of a Specific Genomic Fragment of a TcaC Gene

[0157] Based on the N-terminal amino acid sequence determined for the purified TcaC peptide fraction [disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:2], a pool of degenerate oligonucleotides (pool S4Psh) was synthesized by standard β-cyanoethyl chemistry on an Applied BioSystem ABI394 DNA/RNA Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer, Foster City, Calif.). The oligonucleotides were deprotected 8 hours at 55° C., dissolved in water, quantitated by spectrophotometric measurement, and diluted for use. This pool corresponds to the determined N-terminal amino acid sequence of the TcaC peptide. The determined amino acid sequence and the corresponding degenerate DNA sequence are given below, where A, C, G, and T are the standard DNA bases, and I represents inosine:

Amino	Met	Gln	Asp	Ser	Pro	Glu	Val
Acid
S4Psh	5′ ATG	CA(A/G)	GA(T/C)	(T/A)(C/G)(T/A)	CCI	GA(A/G)	GT 3′

[0158] Another set of degenerate oligonucleotides was synthesized (pool P2.3.5R), representing the complement of the coding strand for the determined amino acid sequence of the SEQ ID NO:17:

Amino	Ala	Phe	Asn	Ile	Asp	Asp	Val
Acid
Codons	5′ GCN	TT(T/C)	AA(T/C)	AT(A/T/C)	GA(T/C)	GA(T/C)	GT 3′
P2.3.5R	3′CG(A/C/G/T)	AA(A/G)	TT(A/G)	TA(T/A/G)	CT(A/G)	CT(A/G)	CA 5′

[0159] These oligonucleotides were used as primers in Polymerase Chain Reactions (PCR®, Roche Molecular Systems, Branchburg, N.J.) to amplify a specific DNA fragment from genomic DNA prepared from Photorhabdus strain W-14 (see above). A typical reaction (50 μl) contained 125 pmol of each primer pool P2Psh and P2.3.5R, 253 ng of genomic template DNA, 10 nmol each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dTTP, 1×GeneAmp® PCR buffer, and 2.5 units of AmpliTaq® DNA polymerase (both from Roche Molecular Systems; 10×GeneAmp® buffer is 100 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.3, 500 mM KCl, 0.01% w/v gelatin). Amplifications were performed in a Perkin Elmer Cetus DNA Thermal Cycler (Perkin Elmer, Foster City, Calif.) using 35 cycles of 94° C. (1.0 min), 55° C. (2.0 min), 72° C. (3.0 min), followed by an extension period of 7.0 min at 72° C. Amplification products were analyzed by electrophoresis through 2% w/v NuSieve® 3:1 agarose (FMC BioProducts) in TEA buffer (40 mM Tris-acetate, 2 mM EDTA, pH 8.0). A specific product of estimated size 250 bp was observed amongst numerous other amplification products by ethidium bromide (0.5 μg/ml) staining of the gel and examination under ultraviolet light.

[0160] The region of the gel containing an approximately 250 bp product was excised, and a small plug (0.5 mm dia.) was removed and used to supply template for PCR amplification (40 cycles). The reaction (50 μl) contained the same components as above, minus genomic template DNA. Following amplification, the ends of the fragments were made blunt and were phosphorylated by incubation at 25° C. for 20 min with 1 unit of T4 DNA polymerase (NEB), 1 nmol ATP, and 2.15 units of T4 kinase (Pharmacia Biotech Inc., Piscataway, N.J.).

[0161] DNA fragments were separated from residual primers by electrophoresis through 1% w/v GTG® agarose (FMC) in TEA. A gel slice containing fragments of apparent size 250 bp was excised, and the DNA was extracted using a Qiaex kit (Qiagen Inc., Chatsworth, Calif.).

[0162] The extracted DNA fragments were ligated to plasmid vector pBC KS(+) (Stratagene) that had been digested to completion with restriction enzyme Sma 1 and extracted in a manner similar to that described for pWE15 DNA above. A typical ligation reaction (16.3 μl) contained 100 ng of digested pBC KS(+) DNA, 70 ng of 250 bp fragment DNA, 1 nmol [Co(NH3)6]Cl3, and 3.9 Weiss units of T4 DNA ligase (Collaborative Biomedical Products, Bedford, Mass.), in 1×ligation buffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4; 10 MM MgCl2; 10 mM dithiothreitol; 1 mM spermidine, 1 mM ATP, 100 mg/ml bovine serum albumin). Following overnight incubation at 14° C., the ligated products were transformed into frozen, competent Escherichia coli DH5α cells (Gibco BRL) according to the suppliers' recommendations, and plated on LB-Cam35 plates, containing IPTG (119 μg/ml) and X-gal (50 μg/ml). Independent white colonies were picked, and plasmid DNA was prepared by a modified alkaline-lysis/PEG precipitation method (PRISM™ Ready Reaction DyeDeoxy™ Terminator Cycle Sequencing Kit Protocols; ABI/Perkin Elmer). The nucleotide sequence of both strands of the insert DNA was determined, using T7 primers [pBC KS(+) bases 601-623: TAAAACGACGGCCAGTGAGCGCG) and LacZ primers [pBC KS(+) bases 792-816: ATGACCATGATTACGCCAAGCGCGC) and protocols supplied with the PRISM™ sequencing kit (ABI/Perkin Elmer). Nonincorporated dye-terminator dideoxyribonucleotides were removed by passage through Centri-Sep 100 columns (Princeton Separations, Inc., Adelphia, N.J.) according to the manufacturer's instructions. The DNA sequence was obtained by analysis of the samples on an ABI Model 373A DNA Sequencer (ABI/Perkin Elmer). The DNA sequences of two isolates, GZ4 and HB14, were found to be as illustrated in FIG. 1.

[0163] This sequence illustrates the following features: 1) bases 1-20 represent one of the 64 possible sequences of the S4Psh degenerate oligonucleotides, ii) the sequence of amino acids 1-3 and 6-12 correspond exactly to that determined for the N-terminus of TcaC (disclosed as SEQ ID NO:2), iii) the fourth amino acid encoded is a cysteine residue rather than serine. This difference is encoded within the degeneracy for the serine codons (see above), iv) the fifth amino acid encoded is proline, corresponding to the TcaC N-terminal sequence given as SEQ ID NO:2, v) bases 257-276 encode one of the 192 possible sequences designed into the degenerate pool, vi) the TGA termination codon introduced at bases 268-270 is the result of complementarity to the degeneracy built into the oligonucleotide pool at the corresponding position, and does not indicate a shortened reading frame for the corresponding gene.

[0164] Labeling of a TcaC Peptide Gene-specific Probe

[0165] DNA fragments corresponding to the above 276 bases were amplified (35 cycles) by PCR® in a 100 μl reaction volume, using 100 pmol each of P2Psh and P2.3.5R primers, 10 ng of plasmids GZ4 or HB14 as templates, 20 nmol each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dTTP, 5 units of AmpliTAq® DNA polymerase, and 1× concentration of GeneAmp® buffer, under the same temperature regimes as described above. The amplification products were extracted from a 1% GTG® agarose gel by Qiaex kit and quantitated by fluorometry.

[0166] The extracted amplification products from plasmid HB14 template (approximately 400 ng) were split into five aliquots and labeled with 32P-dCTP using the High Prime Labeling Mix (Boehringer Mannheim) according to the manufacturer's instructions. Nonincorporated radioisotope was removed by passage through NucTrap® Probe Purification Columns (Stratagene), according to the supplier's instructions. The specific activity of the labeled DNA product was determined by scintillation counting to be 3.11×108 dpm/μg. This labeled DNA was used to probe membranes prepared from 800 members of the genomic library.

[0167] Screening with a TcaC-peptide Gene Specific Probe

[0168] The radiolabeled HB14 probe was boiled approximately 10 min, then added to “minimal hyb” solution. [Note: The “minimal hyb” method is taken from a CERES protocol; “Restriction Fragment Length Polymorphism Laboratory Manual version 4.0”, sections 4-40 and 4-47; CERES/NPI, Salt Lake City, Utah. NPI is now defunct, with its successors operating as Linkage Genetics]. “Minimal hyb” solution contains 10% w/v PEG (polyethylene glycol, M.W. approx. 8000), 7% w/v SDS; 0.6×SSC, 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (from a 1M stock containing 95 g/l NaH2PO.1H2O and 84.5 g/l Na2HPO4.7H2O), 5 mM EDTA, and 100 mg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA. Membranes were blotted dry briefly then, without prehybridization, 5 strips of membrane were placed in each of 2 plastic boxes containing 75 ml of “minimal hyb” and 2.6 ng/ml of radiolabeled HB14 probe. These were incubated overnight with slow shaking (50 rpm) at 60° C. The filters were washed three times for approximately 10 min each at 25° C. in “minimal hyb wash solution” (0.25×SSC, 0.2%. SDS), followed by two 30-min washes with slow shaking at 60° C. in the same solution. The filters were placed on paper covered with Saran Wrap® (Dow Brands, Indianapolis, Ind.) in a light-tight autoradiographic cassette and exposed to X-Omat X-ray film (Kodak, Rochester, N.Y.) with two DuPont Cronex Lightning-Plus C1 enhancers (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.), for 4 hr at −70° C. Upon development (standard photographic procedures), significant signals were evident in both replicates amongst a high background of weaker, more irregular signals. The filters were again washed for about 4 hr at 68° C. in “minimal hyb wash solution” and then placed again in the cassettes and film was exposed overnight at −70° C. Twelve possible positives were identified due to strong signals on both of the duplicate 96-well colony impressions. No signal was seen with negative control membranes (colonies of XL1 Blue MR cells containing pWE15), and a very strong signal was seen with positive control membranes (DH5α cells containing the GZ4 isolate of the PCR product) that had been processed concurrently with the experimental samples.

[0169] The twelve putative hybridization-positive colonies were retrieved from the frozen 96-well library plates and grown overnight at 37° C. on solid LB-Amp100 medium. They were then patched (3/plate, plus three negative controls: XL1 Blue MR cells containing the pWE15 vector) onto solid LB-Amp100. Two sets of membranes (Magna NT nylon, 0.45 micron) were prepared for hybridization. The first set was prepared by placing a filter directly onto the colonies on a patch plate, then removing it with adherent bacterial cells, and processing as below. Filters of the second set were placed on plates containing LB-Amp100 medium, then inoculated by transferring cells from the patch plates onto the filters. After overnight growth at 37° C., the filters were removed from the plates and processed.

[0170] Bacterial cells on the filters were lysed and DNA denatured by placing each filter colony-side-up on a pool (1.0 ml) of 0.5 N NaOH in a plastic plate for 3 min. The filters were blotted dry on a paper towel, then the process was repeated with fresh 0.5 N NaOH. After blotting dry, the filters were neutralized by placing each on a 1.0 ml pool of 1 M Tris-HCl, pH 7.5 for 3 min, blotted dry, and reneutralised with fresh buffer. This was followed by two similar soakings (5 min each) on pools of 0.5 M Tris-HCl pH 7.5 plus 1.5 M NaCl. After blotting dry, the DNA was UV crosslinked to the filter (as above), and the filters were washed (25° C., 100 rpm) in about 100 ml of 3×SSC plus 0.1%(w/v) SDS (4 times, 30 min each with fresh solution for each wash). They were then placed in a minimal volume of prehybridization solution [6×SSC plus 1% w/v each of Ficoll 400 (Pharmacia), polyvinylpyrrolidone (av. M.W. 360,000; Sigma ) and bovine serum albumin Fraction V; (Sigma)] for 2 hr at 65° C., 50 rpm. The prehybridization solution was removed, and replaced with the HB14 32P-labeled probe that had been saved from the previous hybridization of the library membranes and which had been denatured at 95° C. for 5 min. Hybridization was performed at 60° C. for 16 hr with shaking at 50 rpm.

[0171] Following removal of the labeled probe solution, the membranes were washed 3 times at 25° C. (50 rpm, 15 min) in 3×SSC (about 150 ml each wash). They were then washed for 3 hr at 68° C. (50 rpm) in 0.25×SSC plus 0.2% SDS (minimal hyb wash solution), and exposed to X-ray film as described above for 1.5 hr at 25° C. (no enhancer screens). This exposure revealed very strong hybridization signals to cosmid isolates 22G12, 25A10, 26A5, and 26B10, and a very weak signal with cosmid isolate 8B10. No signal was seen with the negative control (pWE15) colonies, and a very strong signal was seen with positive control membranes (DH5α cells containing the GZ4 isolate of the PCR product) that had been processed concurrently with the experimental samples.

[0172] Amplification of a Specific Genomic Fragment of a TcaB Gene

[0173] Based on the N-terminal amino acid sequence determined for the purified TcaBi peptide fraction (disclosed here as SEQ ID NO:3) a pool of degenerate oligonucleotides (pool P8F) was synthesized as described for peptide TcaC. The determined amino acid sequence and the corresponding degenerate DNA sequence are given below, where A, C, G, and T are the standard DNA bases, and I represents inosine:

Amino-	Leu	Phe	Thr	Gln	Thr	Leu	Lys	Glu	Ala	Arg
Acid
P8F	5′	TTT	ACI	CA(A/G)	ACI	(C/T)TI	AAA	GAA	GCI	(A/C)G 3′
	(C/T)TI

[0174] Another set of degenerate oligonucleotides was synthesized (pool P8.108.3R), representing the complement of the coding strand for the determined amino acid sequence of the TcaBi-PT108 internal peptide (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:20):

Amino	Met	Tyr	Tyr	Ile	Gln	Ala	Gln	Gln
Acid
Codons	ATG TA(T/C)	TA(T/C)	AT(T/C/A)	CA(A/G)	GC(A/C/G/T)	CA(A/G	CA(A/G)
P8.108.3R	3′ATCA/G)	AT(A/G)	TA(A/G/T)	GT(T/C)	CGI	GT(T/C)	GT 5′
	TAG

[0175] These oligonucleotides were used as primers for PCR® using HotStart 50 Tubes™ (Molecular Bio-Products, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) to amplify a specific DNA fragment from genomic DNA prepared from Photorhabdus strain W-14 (see above). A typical reaction (50 μl) contained (bottom layer) 25 pmol of each primer pool P8F and P8.108.3R, with 2 nmol each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dTTP, in 1×GeneAmp® PCR buffer, and (top layer) 230 ng of genomic template DNA, 8 nmol each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dTTP, and 2.5 units of AmpliTaq® DNA polymerase, in 1×GeneAmp® PCR buffer. Amplifications were performed by 35 cycles as described for the TcaC peptide. Amplification products were analyzed by electrophoresis through 0.7% w/v SeaKem® LE agarose (FMC) in TEA buffer. A specific product of estimated size 1600 bp was observed.

[0176] Four such reactions were pooled, and the amplified DNA was extracted from a 1.0% SeaKem® LE gel by Qiaex kit as described for the TcaC peptide. The extracted DNA was used directly as the template for sequence determination (PRISM™ Sequencing Kit) using the P8F and P8.108.3R primer pools. Each reaction contained about 100 ng template DNA and 25 pmol of one primer pool, and was processed according to standard protocols as described for the TcaC peptide. An analysis of the sequence derived from extension of the P8F primers revealed the short DNA sequence (and encoded amino acid sequence):

GAT GCA TTG NTT GCT
Asp Ala Leu (Val) Ala

[0177] which corresponds to a portion of the N-terminal peptide sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO:3 (TcaBi).

[0178] Labeling of a TcaBi-peptide Gene-specific Probe

[0179] Approximately 50 ng of gel-purified TcaBi DNA fragment was labeled with 32P-dCTP as described above, and nonincorporated radioisotopes were removed by passage through a NICK Column® (Pharmacia). The specific activity of the labelled DNA was determined to be 6×109 dpm/μg. This labeled DNA was used to probe colony membranes prepared from members of the genomic library that had hybridized to the TcaC-peptide specific probe.

[0180] The membranes containing the 12 colonies identified in the TcaC-probe library screen (see above) were stripped of radioactive TcaC-specific label by boiling twice for approximately 30 min each time in 1 liter of 0.1×SSC plus 0.1% SDS. Removal of radiolabel was checked with a 6 hr film exposure. The stripped membranes were then incubated with the TcaBi peptide-specific probe prepared above. The labeled DNA was denatured by boiling for 10 min, and then added to the filters that had been incubated for 1 hr in 100 ml of “minimal hyb” solution at 60° C. After overnight hybridization at this temperature, the probe solution was removed, and the filters were washed as follows (all in 0.3×SSC plus 0.1% SDS): once for 5 min at 25° C., once for 1 hr at 60° C. in fresh solution, and once for 1 hr at 63° C. in fresh solution. After 1.5 hr exposure to X-ray film by standard procedures, 4 strongly-hybridizing colonies were observed. These were, as with the TcaC-specific probe, isolates 22G12, 25A10, 26A5, and 26B10.

[0181] The same TcaBi probe solution was diluted with an equal volume (about 100 ml) of “minimal hyb” solution, and then used to screen the membranes containing the 800 members of the genomic library. After hybridization, washing, and exposure to X-ray film as described above, only the four cosmid clones 22G12, 25A10, 26A5, and 26B10, were found to hybridize strongly to this probe.

[0182] Isolation of Subclones Containing Genes Encoding TcaC and YcaBi Peptides, and Determination of DNA Base Sequence Thereof

[0183] Three hybridization-positive cosmids in strain XL1 Blue MR were grown with shaking overnight (200 rpm) at 30° C. in 100 ml TB-Amp100. After harvesting the cells by centrifugation, cosmid DNA was prepared using a commercially available kit (BIGprep™, 5 Prime 3 Prime, Inc., Boulder, Colo.), following the manufacturer's protocols. Only one cosmid, 26A5, was successfully isolated by this procedure. When digested with restriction enzyme EcoR 1 (NEB) and analyzed by gel electrophoresis, fragments of approximate sizes 14, 10, 8 (vector), 5, 3.3, 2.9, and 1.5 kbp were detected. A second attempt to isolate cosmid DNA from the same three strains (8 ml cultures; TB-Amp100, 30° C.) utilized a boiling miniprep method (Evans G. and G. Wahl., 1987, “Cosmid vectors for genomic walking and rapid restriction mapping.” in Guide to Molecular Cloning Techniques. Meth. Enzymology, Vol. 152, S. Berger and A. Kimmel, eds., pgs. 604-610). Only one cosmid, 25A10, was successfully isolated by this method. When digested with restriction enzyme EcoR I (NEB) and analyzed by gel electrophoresis, this cosmid showed a fragmentation pattern identical to that previously seen with cosmid 26A5.

[0184] A 0.15 μg sample of 26A5 cosmid DNA was used to transform 50 ml of E. coli DH5α cells (Gibco BRL), by the supplier's protocols. A single colony isolate of that strain was inoculated into 4 ml of TB-Amp100, and grown for 8 hr at 37° C. Chloramphenicol was added to a final concentration of 225 μg/ml, incubation was continued for another 24 hr, then cells were harvested by centrifugation and frozen at −20° C. Isolation of the 26A5 cosmid DNA was by a standard alkaline lysis miniprep (Maniatis et al., op. cit., p. 382), modified by increasing all volumes by 50% and with stirring or gentle mixing, rather than vortexing, at every step. After washing the DNA pellet in 70% ethanol, it was dissolved in TE containing 25 μg/ml ribonuclease A (Boehringer Mannheim).

[0185] Identification of EcoR I Fragments Hybridizing to GZ4-derived and TcaBi-Probes

[0186] Approximately 0.4 μg of cosmid 25A10 (from XL1 Blue MR cells) and about 0.5 μg of cosmid 26A5 (from chloramphenicol-amplified DH5α cells) were each digested with about 15 units of EcoR I(NEB) for 85 min, frozen overnight, then heated at 65° C. for five min, and electrophoresed in a 0.7% agarose gel (Seakem® LE, 1X TEA, 80 volts, 90 min). The DNA was stained with ethidium bromide as described above, and photographed under ultraviolet light. The EcoR I digest of cosmid 25A10 was a complete digestion, but the sample of cosmid 26A5 was only partially digested under these conditions. The agarose gel containing the DNA fragments was subjected to depurination, denaturation and neutralization, followed by Southern blotting onto a Magna NT nylon membrane, using a high salt (20×SSC) protocol, all as described in section 2.9 of Ausubel et al. (CPMB, op. cit.) The transferred DNA was then UV-crosslinked to the nylon membrane as before.

[0187] An TcaC-peptide specific DNA fragment corresponding to the insert of plasmid isolate GZ4 was amplified by PCR® in a 100 ml reaction volume as described previously above. The amplification products from three such reactions were pooled and were extracted from a 1% GTG® agarose gel by Qiaex kit, as described above, and quantitated by fluorometry. The gel-purified DNA (100 ng) was labeled with 32p-dCTP using the High Prime Labeling Mix (Boehringer Mannheim) as described above, to a specific activity of 6.34×108 dpm/μg.

[0188] The 32P-labeled GZ4 probe was boiled 10 min, then added to “minimal hyb” buffer (at 1 ng/ml), and the Southern blot membrane containing the digested cosmid DNA fragments was added, and incubated for 4 hr at 60° C. with gentle shaking at 50 rpm. The membrane was then washed 3 times at 25° C. for about 5 min each (minimal hyb wash solution), followed by two washes for 30 min each at 60° C. The blot was exposed to film (with enhancer screens) for about 30 min at −70° C. The GZ4 probe hybridized strongly to the 5.0 kbp (apparent size) EcoR I fragment of both these two cosmids, 26A5 and 25A10.

[0189] The membrane was stripped of radioactivity by boiling for about 30 min in 0.1×SSC plus 0.1% SDS, and absence of radiolabel was checked by exposure to film. It was then hybridized at 60° C. for 3.5 hours with the (denatured) TcaBi probe in “minimal hyb” buffer previously used for screening the colony membranes (above), washed as described previously, and exposed to film for 40 min at −70° C. with two enhancer screens. With both cosmids, the TcaBi probe hybridized lightly with the about 5.0 kbp EcoR 1 fragment, and strongly with a fragment of approximately 2.9 kbp.

[0190] The sample of cosmid 26A5 DNA previously described, (from DH5α cells) was used as the source of DNA from which to subclone the bands of interest. This DNA (2.5 μg) was digested with about 3 units of EcoR I (NEB) in a total volume of 30 μl for 1.5 hr, to give a partial digest, as confirmed by gel electrophoresis. Ten μg of pBC KS (+) DNA (Stratagene) were digested for 1.5 hr with 20 units of EcoR I in a total volume of 20 μl, leading to total digestion as confirmed by electrophoresis. Both EcoR I-cut DNA preparations were diluted to 50 μl with water, to each an equal volume of PCI was added, the suspension was gently mixed, spun in a microcentrifuge and the aqueous supernatant was collected. DNA was precipitated by 150 μl ethanol, and the mixture was placed at −20° C. overnight. Following centrifugation and drying, the EcoR I-digested pBC KS (+) was dissolved in 100 μl TE; the partially digested 26A5 was dissolved in 20 μl TE. DNA recovery was checked by fluorometry.

[0191] In separate reactions, approximately 60 ng of EcoR I-digested pBC KS(+) DNA was ligated with approximately 180 ng or 270 ng of partially digested cosmid 26A5 DNA. Ligations were carried out in a volume of 20 μl at 15° C. for 5 hr, using T4 ligase and buffer from New England BioLabs. The ligation mixture, diluted to 100 μl with sterile TE, was used to transform frozen, competent DH5α cells (Gibco BRL) according to the supplier's instructions. Varying amounts (25-200 μl) of the transformed cells were plated on freshly prepared solid LB-Cam35 medium with 1 mM IPTG and 50 mg/l X-gal. Plates were incubated at 37° C. about 20 hr, then chilled in the dark for approximately 3 hr to intensify color for insert selection. White colonies were picked onto patch plates of the same composition and incubated overnight at 37° C.

[0192] Two colony lifts of each of the selected patch plates were prepared as follows. After picking white colonies to fresh plates, round Magna NT nylon membranes were pressed onto the patch plates, the membrane was lifted off, and subjected to denaturation, neutralization and UV crosslinking as described above for the library colony membranes. The crosslinked colony lifts were vigorously washed, including gently wiping off the excess cell debris with a tissue. One set was hybridized with the GZ4 (TcaC) probe solution described earlier, and the other set was hybridized with the TcaBi probe solution described earlier, according to the ‘minimal hyb’ protocol, followed by washing and film exposure as described for the library colony membranes.

[0193] Colonies showing hybridization signals either only with the GZ4 probe, with both GZ4 and TcaBi probes, or only with the TcaBi probe, were selected for further work and cells were streaked for single colony isolation onto LB-Cam35 media with IPTG and X-gal as before. Approximately 35 single colonies, from 16 different isolates, were picked into liquid LB-Cam35 media and grown overnight at 37° C.; the cells were collected by centrifugation and plasmid DNA was isolated by a standard alkaline lysis miniprep according to Maniatis et al. (op. cit. p. 368). DNA pellets were dissolved in TE+25 μg/ml ribonuclease A and DNA concentration was determined by fluorometry. The EcoR I digestion pattern was analyzed by gel electrophoresis. The following isolates were picked as useful. Isolate A17.2 contains religated pBC KS(+) only and was used for a (negative) control. Isolates D38.3 and C44.1 each contain only the 2.9 kbp, TcaBi-hybridizing EcoR I fragment inserted into pBC KS(+). These plasmids, named pDAB2000 and pDAB2001, respectively, are illustrated in FIG. 2.

[0194] Isolate A35.3 contains only the approximately 5 kbp, GZ4)-hybridizing EcoR 1 fragment, inserted into pBC KS(+). This plasmid was named pDAB2002 (also FIG. 2). These isolates provided templates for DNA sequencing.

[0195] Plasmids pDAB2000 and pDAB2001 were prepared using the BIGprep™ kit as before. Cultures (30 ml) were grown overnight in TB-Cam35 to an OD600 of 2, then plasmid was isolated according to the manufacturer's directions. DNA pellets were redissolved in 100 μl TE each, and sample integrity was checked by EcoR I digestion and gel electrophoretic analysis.

[0196] Sequencing reactions were run in duplicate, with one replicate using as template pDAB2000 DNA, and the other replicate using as template pDAB2001 DNA. The reactions were carried out using the dideoxy dye terminator cycle sequencing method, as described above for the sequencing of the GZ4/HB14 DNAs. Initial sequencing runs utilized as primers the LacZ and T7 primers described above, plus primers based on the determined sequence of the TcaBi PCR amplification product (TH1=ATTGCAGACTGCCAATCGCTTCGG, TH12=GAGAGTATCCAGACCGCGGATGATCTG).

[0197] After alignment and editing of each sequencing output, each was truncated to between 250 to 350 bases, depending on the integrity of the chromatographic data as interpreted by the Perkin Elmer Applied Biosystems Division SeqEd 675 software. Subsequent sequencing “steps” were made by selecting appropriate sequence for new primers. With a few exceptions, primers (synthesized as described above) were 24 bases in length with a 50% G+C composition. Sequencing by this method was carried out on both strands of the approximately 2.9 kbp EcoR I fragment.

[0198] To further serve as template for DNA sequencing, plasmid DNA from isolate pDAB2002 was prepared by BIGprep® kit. Sequencing reactions were performed and analyzed as described above. Initially, a T3 primer (pBS SK (+) bases 774-796: CGCGCAATTAACCCTCACTAAAG) and a T7 primer (pBS KS (+) bases 621-643: GCGCGTAATACGACTCACTATAG) were used to prime the sequencing reactions from the flanking vector sequences, reading into the insert DNA. Another set of primers, (GZ4F: GTATCGATTACAACGCTGTCACTTCCC; TH13: GGGAAGTGACAGCGTTGTAATCGATAC; TH14: ATGTTGGGTGCGTCGGCTAATGGACATAAC; and LW1-204: GGGAAGTGACAGCGTTGTAATCGATAC) was made to prime from internal sequences, which were determined previously by degenerate oligonucleotide-mediated sequencing of subcloned TcaC-peptide PCR products. From the data generated during the initial rounds of sequencing, new sets of primers were designed and used to walk the entire length of the about 5 kbp fragment. A total of 55 oligo primers was used, enabling the identification of 4832 total bp of contiguous sequence.

[0199] When the DNA sequence of the EcoR I fragment insert of pDAB2002 is combined with part of the determined sequence of the pDAB2000/pDAB2001 isolates, a total contiguous sequence of 6005 bp was generated (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:25). When long open reading frames were translated into the corresponding amino acids, the sequence clearly shows the TcaBi N-terminal peptide (disclosed as SEQ ID NO:3), encoded by bases 68-124, immediately following a methionine residue (start of translation). Upstream lies a potential ribosome binding site (bases 51-58), and downstream, at bases 215-277 is encoded the TcaBi-PT158 internal peptide (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:19). Further downstream, in the same reading frame, at bases 1787-1822, exists a sequence encoding the TcaBi-PT108 internal peptide (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:20). Also in the same reading frame, at bases 1946-1972, is encoded the TcaBii N-terminal peptide (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:5), and the reading frame continues uninterrupted to a translation termination codon at nucleotides 3632-3634.

[0200] The lack of an in-frame stop codon between the end of the sequence encoding TcaBi-PT108 and the start of the TcaBii encoding region, and the lack of a discernible ribosome binding site immediately upstream of the TcaBii coding region, indicate that peptides TcaBii and TcaBi are encoded by a single open reading frame of 3567 bp beginning at base pair 65 in SEQ ID NO:25), and are most likely derived from a single primary gene product TcaB of 1189 amino acids (131,586 Daltons; disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:26) by post-translational cleavage. If the amino acid immediately preceding the TcaBii N-terminal peptide represents the C-terminal amino acid of peptide TcaBi, then the predicted mass of TcaBii (627 amino acids) is 70,814 Daltons (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:28), somewhat higher than the size observed by SDS-PAGE (68 kDa). This peptide would be encoded by a contiguous stretch of 1881 base pairs (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:27). It is thought that the native C-terminus of TcaBi lies somewhat closer to the C-terminus of TcaBi-PT108. The molecular mass of PT108 [3.438 kDa; determined during N-terminal amino acid sequence analysis of this peptide] predicts a size of 30 amino acids. Using the size of this peptide to designate the C-terminus of the TcaBi coding region [Glu at position 604 of SEQ ID NO:28], the derived size of TcaBi is determined to be 604 amino acids or 68,463 Daltons, more in agreement with experimental observations.

[0201] Translation of the TcaBii peptide coding region of 1686 base pairs (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:29) yields a protein of 562 amino acids (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:30) with predicted mass of 60,789 Daltons, which corresponds well with the observed 61 kDa.

[0202] A potential ribosome binding site (bases 3682-3687) is found 48 bp downstream of the stop codon for the tcaB open reading frame. At bases 3694-3726 is found a sequence encoding the N-terminus of peptide TcaC, (disclosed as SEQ ID NO.2). The open reading frame initiated by this N-terminal peptide continues uninterrupted to base 6005 (2361 base pairs, disclosed herein as the first 2361 base pairs of SEQ ID NO.31). A gene (tcaC) encoding the entire TcaC peptide, (apparent size about 165 kDa; about 1500 amino acids), would comprise about 4500 bp.

[0203] Another isolate containing cloned EcoR I fragments of cosmid 26A5, E20.6, was also identified by its homology to the previously mentioned GZ4 and TcaBi probes. Agarose gel analysis of EcoR I digests of the DNA of the plasmid harbored by this strain (pDAB2004, FIG. 2), revealed insert fragments of estimated sizes 2.9, 5, and 3.3 kbp. DNA sequence analysis initiated from primers designed from the sequence of plasmid pDAB2002 revealed that the 3.3 kbp EcoR I fragment of pDAB2004 lies adjacent to the 5 kbp EcoR I fragment represented in pDAB2002. The 2361 base pair open reading frame discovered in pDAB2002 continues uninterrupted for another 2094 bases in pDAB2004 [disclosed herein as base pairs 2362 to 4458 of SEQ ID NO:31]. DNA sequence analysis using the parent cosmid 26A5 DNA as template confirmed the continuity of the open reading frame. Altogether, the open reading frame (tcaC SEQ ID NO:31) comprises 4455 base pairs, and encodes a protein (TcaC) of 1485 amino acids [disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:32]. The calculated molecular size of 166,214 Daltons is consistent with the estimated size of the TcaC peptide (165 kDa), and the derived amino acid sequence matches exactly that disclosed for the TcaC N-terminal sequence [SEQ ID NO:2].

[0204] The lack of an amino acid sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:17; used to design the degenerate oligonucleotide primer pool in the discovered sequence indicates that the generation of the PCR® products found in isolates GZ4 and HB14, which were used as probes in the initial library screen, were fortuitously generated by reverse-strand priming by one of the primers in the degenerate pool. Further, the derived protein sequence does not include the internal fragment disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:18. These sequences reveal that plasmid pDAB2004 contains the complete coding region for the TcaC peptide.

[0205] Further analysis of SEQ ID NO:25 reveals the end of an open reading frame (bases 1-43), which encodes the final 13 amino acids of the TcaAiii peptide, disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:35. Only 24 bases separate the end of the TcaAiii coding region and the start of the TcaBi coding region. Included within the 24 bases are sequences that may serve as a ribosome binding site. Although possible, it is not likely that a Photorhabdus gene promoter is encoded within this short region. We propose that genomic region tca, which includes three long open reading frames [tcaA (SEQ ID NO:33), tcaB (SEQ ID NO:25, bases 65-36334), and tcaC (SEQ ID NO:31),which is separated from the end of tcaB by only 59 bases] is regulated as an operon, with transcription initiating upstream of the start of the tcaA gene (SEQ ID NO:33), and resulting in a polycistronic messenger RNA.

EXAMPLE 9

Screening of the Photorhabdus Genomic Library for Genes Encoding the TcbAii Peptide

[0206] This example describes a method used to identify DNA clones that contain the TcbAii peptide-encoding genes, the isolation of the gene, and the determination of its partial DNA base sequence.

[0207] Primers and PCR Reactions

[0208] The TcbAii polypeptide of the insect active preparation is about 206 kDa. The amino acid sequence of the N-terminus of this peptide is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:1. Four pools of degenerate oligonucleotide primers (“Forward primers”: TH-4, TH-5, TH-6, and TH-7) were synthesized to encode a portion of this amino acid sequence, as described in Example 8, and are shown below.

TABLE 12
Amino
Acid	Phe	Ile	Gln	Gly	Tyr	Ser	Asp	Leu	Phe
TH-4	5′-TT(T/C)	ATI	CA(A/G)	GGI	TACT/C)	TCI	GA(T/C)	CTI	TT-3′
TH-5	5′-TT(T/C)	ATI	CA(A/G)	GGI	TACT/C)	AG(T/C)	GA(T/C)	CTI	TT-3′
TH-6	5′-TT(T/C)	ATI	CA(A/G)	GGI	TACT/C)	TCI	GA(T/C)	TT(A/G)	TT-3′
TH-7	5′-TT(T/C)	ATI	CA(A/G)	GGI	TA(T/C)	AG(T/C)	GA(T/C)	TT(A/G)	TT-3′

[0209] In addition, a primary (“a”) and a secondary (“b”) sequence of an internal peptide preparation (TcbAii-PT81) have been determined and are disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:23 and SEQ ID NO:24, respectively. Four pools of degenerate oligonucleotides (“Reverse Primers”: TH-8, TH-9, TH-10 and TH-11) were similarly designed and synthesized to encode the reverse complement of sequences that encode a portion of the peptide of SEQ ID NO:23, as shown below.

TABLE 13

Amino

Acid

Thr

Tyr

Leu

Thr

Ser

Phe

Glu

Gln

Val

Ala

Asn

TH-8

3′TGI

AT(A/G)

GAI

TGI

AGI

AA(A/G)

CT(T/C)

GT(T/C)

CAI

CGI

TT(G/A)-5′

TH-9

3′TGI

AT(A/G)

TT(A/G)

TGI

AGI

AA(A/G)

CT(T/C)

GT(T/C)

CAT

CGI

TT(G/A)-5′

TH-10

3′TGI

AT(A/G)

GAI

TGI

TC(G/A)

AA(A/G)

CT(T/C)

GT(T/C)

CAT

CGI

TT(G/A)-5′

TH-11

3′TGI

ATCA/G)

TT(A/G)

TGI

TC(G/A)

AA(A/G)

CT(T/C)

GT(T/C)

CAT

CGI

TT(G/A)-5′

[0210] Sets of these primers were used in PCR® reactions to amplify TcbAii-encoding gene fragments from the genomic Photorhabdus luminescens W-14 DNA prepared in Example 6. All PCR® reactions were run with the “Hot Start” technique using AmpliWax™ gems and other Perkin Elmer reagents and protocols. Typically, a mixture (total volume 11 μl) of MgCl2, dNTP's, 10×GeneAmp® PCR Buffer II, and the primers were added to tubes containing a single wax bead. [10×GeneAmp® PCR Buffer II is composed of 100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3; and 500 mM KCl.] The tubes were heated to 80° C. for 2 minutes and allowed to cool. To the top of the wax seals, a solution containing 10×GeneAmp® PCR Buffer II, DNA template, and AmpliTaq® DNA polymerase were added. Following melting of the wax seal and mixing of components by thermal cycling, final reaction conditions (volume of 50 μl) were: 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3; 50 mM KCl; 2.5 mM MgCl2; 200 μM each in dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP; 1.25 mM in a single Forward primer pool; 1.25 μM in a single Reverse primer pool, 1.25 units of AmpliTaq® DNA polymerase, and 170 ng of template DNA.

[0211] The reactions were placed in a thermocycler (as in Example 8) and run with the following program:

TABLE 14
Temperature	Time	Cycle Repetition
94° C.	2 minutes	1X
94° C.	15 seconds
55-65° C.	30 seconds	30X
72° C.	1 minute
72° C.	7 minutes	1X
15° C.	Constant

[0212] A series of amplifications was run at three different annealing temperatures (55°, 60°, 65° C.) using the degenerate primer pools. Reactions with annealing at 65° C. had no amplification products visible following agarose gel electrophoresis. Reactions having a 60° C. annealing regime and containing primers TH-5+TH-10 produced an amplification product that had a mobility corresponding to 2.9 kbp. A lesser amount of the 2.9 kbp product was produced under these conditions with primers TH-7+TH-10. When reactions were annealed at 55° C., these primer pairs produced more of the 2.9 kbp product, and this product was also produced by primer pairs TH-5+TH-8 and TH-5+TH-11. Additional very faint 2.9 kbp bands were seen in lanes containing amplification products from primer pairs TH-7 plus TH-8, TH-9, TH-10, or TH11.

[0213] To obtain sufficient PCR amplification product for cloning and DNA sequence determination, 10 separate PCR reactions were set up using the primers TH-5+TH-10, and were run using the above conditions with a 55° C. annealing temperature. All reactions were pooled and the 2.9 kbp product was purified by Qiaex extraction from an agarose gel as described above.

[0214] Additional sequences determined for TcbAii internal peptides are disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:21 and SEQ ID NO:22. As before, degenerate oligonucleotides (Reverse primers TH-17 and TH-18) were made corresponding to the reverse complement of sequences that encode a portion of the amino acid sequence of these peptides.

TABLE 15
From SEQ ID NO:21
Amino
Acid	Met	Glu	Thr	Gln	Asn	Ile	Gln	Glu	Pro
TH-17	3′-TAC	CTT/C	TGI	GTT/C	TTA/G	TAI	GTT/C	GTT/C	GG-5′

[0215]

TABLE 16
From SEQ ID NO:22
Amino
Acid	Asn	Pro	Ile	Asn	Ile	Asn	Thr	Gly	Ile	Asp
Th-18	3′-TT(A/G)	GGI	TAI	TT(A/G)	TAI	TTCA?G)	TGI	CCI	TAI	CT(A/G)-5′

[0216] Degenerate oligonucleotides TH-18 and TH-17 were used in an amplification experiment with Photorhabdus luminescens W-14 DNA as template and primers TH-4, TH-5, TH-6, or TH-7 as the 5′-(Forward) primers. These reactions amplified products of approximately 4 kbp and 4.5 kbp, respectively. These DNAs were transferred from agarose gels to nylon membranes and hybridized with a 32P-labeled probe (as described above) prepared from the 2.9 kbp product amplified by the TH-5+TH10 primer pair. Both the 4 kbp and the 4.5 kbp amplification products hybridized strongly to the 2.9 kbp probe. These results were used to construct a map ordering the TcbAii internal peptide sequences as shown in FIG. 3. Approximate distances between the primers are shown in nucleotides in FIG. 3.

[0217] DNA Sequence of the 2.9 kbp TcbAii-encoding Fragment

[0218] Approximately 200 ng of the purified 2.9 kbp fragment (prepared above) was precipitated with ethanol and dissolved in 17 ml of water. One-half of this was used as sequencing template with 25 pmol of the TH-5 pool as primers, the other half was used as template for TH-10 priming. Sequencing reactions were as given in Example 8. No reliable sequence was produced using the TH-10 primer pool; however, reactions with TH-5 primer pool produced the sequence disclosed below:.

1   AATCGTGTTG ATCCCTATGC CGNGCCCGGT TCGGTGGAAT CGATGTCCTC ACCGGGGGTT
61  TATTNGAGGG ANTNGTCCCG TGAGGCCAAA AANTGGAATG AAAGAAGTTC AATTTNTTAC
121 CTAGATAAAC GTCGCCCGGN TTTAGAAAGN TTANTGNTCA GCCAGAAAAT TTTGGTTGAG
181 GAAATTCCAC CGNTGGTTCT CTCTATTGAT TNGGGCCTGG CCGGGTTCGA ANNAAAACNA
241 GGAAATNCAC AAGTTGAGGT GATGGNTTTG TNGCNANCTT NTCGTTTAGG TGGGGAGAAA
301 CCTTNTCANC ACGNTTNTGA AACTGTCCGG GAAATCGTCC ATGAMCGTGA NCCAGGNTTN
361 CGCCATTGG

[0219] Based on this sequence, a sequencing primer (TH-21, 5′-CCGGGCGACGTTTATCTAGG-3′) was designed to reverse complement bases 120-139, and initiate polymerization towards the 5′ end (i.e., TH-5 end) of the gel-purified 2.9 kbp TcbAii-encoding PCR fragment. The determined sequence is shown below, and is compared to the biochemically determined N-terminal peptide sequence of TcbAii SEQ ID NO:1.

[0220] TcbAii 2.9 kbp PCR Fragment Sequence Confirmation [Underlined Amino Acids=Encoded by Degenerate Oligonucleotides]

            F   I   O   G   Y   S   D   L   F   G   -   -   A SEQ ID NO:1
            |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |
2.9 kbp seq GC ATG CAG GGG TAT AGT GAC CTG TTT GGT AAT CGT GCT
            M   Q   G   Y   S   D   L   F   G   N   R   A >

[0221] From the homology of the derived amino acid sequence to the biochemically determined one, it is clear that the 2.9 kbp PCR fragment represents the TcbA coding region. This 2.9 kbp fragment was then used as a hybridization probe to screen the Photorhabdus W-14 genomic library prepared in Example 8 for cosmids containing the TcbAii-encoding gene.

[0222] Screening the Photorhabdus Cosmid Library

[0223] The 2.9 kb gel-purified PCR fragment was labeled with 32P using the Boehringer Mannheim High Prime labeling kit as described in Example 8. Filters containing remnants of approximately 800 colonies from the cosmid library were screened as described previously (Example 8), and positive clones were streaked for isolated colonies and rescreened. Three clones (8A11, 25G8, and 26D1) gave positive results through several screening and characterization steps. No hybridization of the TcbAii-specific probe was ever observed with any of the four cosmids identified in Example 8, and which contain the tcab and tcaC genes. DNA from cosmids 8A11, 25G8, and 26D1 was digested with restriction enzymes Bgl II, EcoR I or Hind III (either alone or in combination with one another), and the fragments were separated on an agarose gel and transferred to a nylon membrane as described in Example 8. The membrane was hybridized with 32P-labeled probe prepared from the 4.5 kbp fragment (generated by amplification of Photorhabdus genomic DNA with primers TH-5+TH-17). The patterns generated from cosmid DNAs 8A11 and 26D1 were identical to those generated with similarly-cut genomic DNA on the same membrane. It is concluded that cosmids 8A11 and 26D1 are accurate representations of the genomic TcbAii encoding locus. However, cosmid 25G8 has a single Bgl II fragment which is slightly larger than the genomic DNA. This may result from positioning of the insert within the vector.

[0224] DNA Sequence of the tcbA-encoding Gene

[0225] The membrane hybridization analysis of cosmid 26D1 revealed that the 4.5 kbp probe hybridized to a single large EcoR I fragment (greater than 9 kbp). This fragment was gel purified and ligated into the EcoR I site of pBC KS (+) as described in Example 8, to generate plasmid pBC-S1/R1. The partial DNA sequence of the insert DNA of this plasmid was determined by “primer walking” from the flanking vector sequence, using procedures described in Example 8. Further sequence was generated by extension from new oligonucleotides designed from the previously determined sequence. When compared to the determined DNA sequence for the tcbA gene identified by other methods (disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:11 as described in Example 12 below), complete homology was found to nucleotides 1-272, 319-826, 2578-3036, and 3068-3540 (total bases=1712). It was concluded that both approaches can be used to identify DNA fragments encoding the TcbAii peptide.

[0226] Analysis of the Derived Amino Acid Sequence of the tcbA Gene

[0227] The sequence of the DNA fragment identified as SEQ ID NO:11 encodes a protein whose derived amino acid sequence is disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:12. Several features verify the identity of the gene as that encoding the TcbAii protein. The TcbAii N-terminal peptide (SEQ ID NO:1; Phe Ile Gln Gly Tyr Ser Asp Leu Phe Gly Asn Arg Ala) is encoded as amino acids 88-100. The TcbAii internal peptide TcbAii-PT81(a) (SEQ ID NO:23) is encoded as amino acids 1065-1077, and TcbAii-PT81 (b) (SEQ ID NO:24) is encoded as amino acids 1571-1592. Further, the internal peptide TcbAii-PT56 (SEQ ID NO:22) is encoded as amino acids 1474-1488, and the internal peptide TcbAii-PT103 (SEQ ID NO:21) is encoded as amino acids 1614-1639. It is obvious that this gene is an authentic clone encoding the TcbAii peptide as isolated from insecticidal protein preparations of Photorhabdus luminescens strain W-14.

[0228] The protein isolated as peptide TcbAii is derived from cleavage of a longer peptide. Evidence for this is provided by the fact that the nucleotides encoding the TcbAii N-terminal peptide SEQ ID NO:1 are preceded by 261 bases (encoding 87 N-terminal-proximal amino acids) of a longer open reading frame (SEQ ID NO:11). This reading frame begins with nucleotides that encode the amino acid sequence Met Gln Asn Ser Leu, which corresponds to the N-terminal sequence of the large peptide TcbA, and is disclosed herein as SEQ ID NO:16. It is thought that TcbA is the precursor protein for TcbAii.

[0229] Relationship of tcbA, tcaB and tcaC Genes

[0230] The tcaB and tcaC genes are closely linked and may be transcribed as a single mRNA (Example 8). The tcbA gene is borne on cosmids that apparently do not overlap the ones harboring the tcaB and tcaC cluster, since the respective genomic library screens identified different cosmids. However, comparison of the amino sequences encoded by the tcab and tcaC genes with the tcbA gene reveals a substantial degree of homology. The amino acid conservation (Protein Alignment Mode of MacVector™ Sequence Analysis Software, scoring matrix pam250, hash value=2; Oxford Molecular Group, Campbell, Calif.) is shown in FIG. 4. On the score line of each panel in FIG. 4, up carats ({circumflex over ( )}) indicate homology or conservative amino acid changes, and down carats (v) indicate nonhomology.

[0231] This analysis shows that the amino acid sequence of the TcbA peptide from residues 1739 to 1894 is highly homologous to amino acids 441 to 603 of the TcaBi peptide (162 of the total 627 amino acids of TcaB; SEQ ID NO:28). In addition, the sequence of TcbA amino acids 1932 to 2459 is highly homologous to amino acids 12 to 531 of peptide TcaBii (520 of the total 562 amino acids; SEQ ID NO:30). Considering that the TcbA peptide (SEQ ID NO:12) comprises 2505 amino acids, a total of 684 amino acids (27%) at the C-proximal end of it is homologous to the TcaBi or TcaBii peptides, and the homologies are arranged colinear to the arrangement of the putative TcaB preprotein (SEQ ID NO:26). A sizeable gap in the TcbA homology coincides with the junction between the TcaBi and TcaBii portions of the TcaB preprotein. Clearly the TcbA and TcaB gene products are evolutionarily related, and it is proposed that they share some common function(s) in Photorhabdus.

Example 10

Characterization of Zinc-metalloproteases in Photorhabdus Broth: Protease Inhibition, Classification, and Purification

[0232] Protease Inhibition and Classification Assays: Protease assays were performed using FITC-casein dissolved in water as substrate (0.08% final assay concentration). Proteolysis reactions were performed at 25° C. for 1 h in the appropriate buffer with 25 μl of Photorhabdus broth (150 μl total reaction volume). Samples were also assayed in the presence and absence of dithiothreitol. After incubation, an equal volume of 12% trichloroacetic acid was added to precipitate undigested protein. Following precipitation for 0.5 h and subsequent centrifugation, 100 μl of the supernatant was placed into a 96-well microtiter plate and the pH of the solution was adjusted by addition of an equal volume of 4N NaOH. Proteolysis was then quantitated using a Fluoroskan II fluorometric plate reader at excitation and emission wavelengths of 485 and 538 nm, respectively. Protease activity was tested over a range from pH 5.0-10.0 in 0.5 units increments. The following buffers were used at 50 mM final concentration: sodium acetate (pH 5.0-6.5); Tris-HCL (pH 7.0-8.0); and bis-Tris propane (pH 8.5-10.0). To identify the class of protease(s) observed, crude broth was treated with a variety of protease inhibitors (0.5 μg/μl final concentration) and then examined for protease activity at pH 8.0 using the substrate described above. The protease inhibitors used included E-64 (L-trans-expoxysaccinylleucylamido[4-,-guanidino]-butane), 3,4 dichloroisocoumarin, Leupeptin, pepstatin, amastatin, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and 1,10 phenanthroline.

[0233] Protease assays performed over a pH range revealed that indeed protease(s) were present which exhibited maximal activity at about pH 8.0 (Table 17). Addition of DTT did not have any effect on protease activity. Crude broth was then treated with a variety of protease inhibitors (Table 18). Treatment of crude broth with the inhibitors described above revealed that 1,10 phenanthroline caused complete inhibition of all protease activity when added at a final concentration of 50 μg, with the IC50=5 μg in 100 μl of a 2 mg/ml crude broth solution. These data indicate that the most abundant protease(s) found in the Photorhabdus broth are from the zinc-metalloprotease class of enzymes.

TABLE 17
Effect of pH on the Protease Activity Found in a Day 1 Production of
Photorhabdus luminescens (Strain W-14)
		Percent
pH	Flu. Unitsa	Activityb
5.0	3013 ± 78	17
5.5	7994 ± 448	45
6.0	12965 ± 483	74
6.5	14390 ± 1291	82
7.0	14386 ± 1287	82
7.5	14135 ± 198	80
8.0	17582 ± 831	100
8.5	16183 ± 953	92
9.0	16795 ± 760	96
9.5	16279 ± 1022	93
10.0	15225 ± 210	87
aFlu. Units = Fluorescence Units (Maximum = about 28,000; background = about 2200).
B Percent activity relative to the maximum at pH 8.0

[0234]

TABLE 18
Effect of Different Protease Inhibitors on the Protease Activity at
pH 8 Found in a Day 1 Production of Photorhabdus
luminescens (Strain W-14)
Inhibitor	Corrected Flu. Unitsa	Percent Inhibitionb
Control	13053	0
E-64	14259	0
1,10 Phenanthrolinec	15	99
3,4 Dichloroisocoumarind	7956	39
Leupeptin	13074	0
Pepstatinc	13441	0
Amastatin	12474	4
DMSO Control	12005	8
Methanol Control	12125	7
a Corrected Flu. Units = Fluorescence Units − background(2200 flu. units).
b Percent Inhibition relative to protease activity at pH 8.0.
c Inhibitors were dissolved in methanol.
d Inhibitors were dissolved in DMSO.

[0235] The isolation of a zinc-metalloprotease was performed by applying dialyzed 10-80% ammonium sulfate pellet to a Q Sepharose column equilibrated at 50 mM Na2PO4, pH 7.0 as described in Example 5 for Photorhabdus toxin. After extensive washing, a 0 to 0.5 M NaCl gradient was used to elute toxin protein. The majority of biological activity and protein was eluted from 0.15-0.45 M NaCl. However, it was observed that the majority of proteolytic activity was present in the 0.25-0.35 M NaCl fraction with some activity in the 0.15-0.25 M NaCl fraction. SDS PAGE analysis of the 0.25-0.35 M NaCl fraction showed a major peptide band of approximately 60 kDa. The 0.15-0.25 M NaCl fraction contained a similar 60 kDa band but at lower relative protein concentration. Subsequent gel filtration of this fraction using a Superose 12 HR 16/50 column resulted in a major peak migrating at 57.5 kDa that contained a predominant (>90% of total stained protein) 58.5 kDa band by SDS PAGE analysis. Additional analysis of this fraction using various protease inhibitors as described above determined that the protease was a zinc-metalloprotease. Nearly all of the protease activity present in Photorhabdus broth at day 1 of fermentation corresponded to the about 58 kDa zinc-metalloprotease.

[0236] In yet a second isolation of zinc-metalloprotease(s), W-14 Photorhabdus broth grown for three days was taken and protease activity was visualized using sodium dodecyl sulfate-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (SDS-PAGE) laced with gelatin as described in Schmidt, T. M., Bleakley, B. and Nealson, K. M. 1988. SDS running gels (5.5×8 cm) were made with 12.5% polyacrylamide (40% stock solution of acrylamide/bis-acrylamide; Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.) into which 0.1% gelatin final concentration (Biorad EIA grade reagent; Richmond Calif.) was incorporated upon dissolving in water. SDS-stacking gels (1.0×8 cm) were made with 5% polyacrylamide, also laced with 0.1% gelatin. Typically, 2.5 μg of protein to be tested was diluted in 0.03 ml of SDS-PAGE loading buffer without dithiothreitol (DTT) and loaded onto the gel. Proteins were electrophoresed in SDS running buffer (Laemmli, U.K. 1970. Nature 227, 680) at 0° C. and at 8 mA. After electrophoresis was complete, the gel was washed for 2 h in 2.5% (v/v) Triton X-100. Gels were then incubated for 1 h at 37° C. in 0.1 M glycine (pH 8.0). After incubation, gels were fixed and stained overnight with 0.1% amido black in methanol-acetic acid-water (30:10:60, vol./vol./vol.; Sigma Chemical Co.). Protease activity was visualized as light areas against a dark, amido black stained background due to proteolysis and subsequent diffusion of incorporated gelatin. At least three distinct bands produced by proteolytic activity at 58-, 41-, and 38 kDa were observed.

[0237] Activity assays of the different proteases in W-14 day three culture broth were performed using FITC-casein dissolved in water as substrate (0.02% final assay concentration). Proteolysis experiments were performed at 37° C. for 0-0.5 h in 0.1M Tris-HCl (pH 8.0) with different protein fractions in a total volume of 0.15 ml. Reactions were terminated by addition of an equal volume of 12% trichloroacetic acid (TCA) dissolved in water. After incubation at room temperature for 0.25 h, samples were centrifuged at 10,000×g for 0.25 h and 0.10 ml aliquots were removed and placed into 96-well microtiter plates. The solution was then neutralized by the addition of an equal volume of 2 N sodium hydroxide, followed by quantitation using a Fluoroskan II fluorometric plate reader with excitation and emission wavelengths of 485 and 538 nm, respectively. Activity measurements were performed using FITC-Casein with different protease concentrations at 37° C. for 0-10 min. A unit of activity was arbitrarily defined as the amount of enzyme needed to produce 1000 fluorescent units/min and specific activity was defined as units/mg of protease.

[0238] Inhibition studies were performed using two zinc-metalloprotease inhibitors; 1,10 phenanthroline and N-(a-rhamnopyranosyloxyhydroxyphosphinyl)-Leu-Trp(phosphoramidon) with stock solutions of the inhibitors dissolved in 100% ethanol and water, respectively. Stock concentrations were typically 10 mg/ml and 5 mg/ml for 1,10 phenanthroline and phosphoramidon, respectively, with final concentrations of inhibitor at 0.5-1.0 mg/ml per reaction. Treatment of three day W-14 crude broth with 1,10 phenanthroline, an inhibitor of all zinc metalloproteases, resulted in complete elimination of all protease activity while treatment with phosphoramidon, an inhibitor of thermolysin-like proteases (Weaver, L. H., Kester, W. R., and Matthews, B. W. 1977. J. Mol. Biol. 114, 119-132), resulted in about 56% reduction of protease activity. The residual proteolytic activity could not be further reduced with additional phosphoramidon.

[0239] The proteases of three day W-14 Photorhabdus broth were purified as follows: 4.0 liters of broth were concentrated using an Amicon spiral ultra filtration cartridge Type S1Y100 attached to an Amicon M-12 filtration device. The flow-through material having native proteins less than 100 kDa in size (3.8 L) was concentrated to 0.375 L using an Amicon spiral ultra filtration cartridge Type S1Y10 attached to an Amicon M-12 filtration device. The retentate material contained proteins ranging in size from 10-100 kDa. This material was loaded onto a Pharmacia HR16/10 column which had been packed with PerSeptive Biosystem (Framington, Mass.) Poros® 50 HQ strong anion exchange packing that had been equilibrated in 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0). Proteins were loaded on the column at a flow rate of 5 ml/min, followed by washing unbound protein with buffer until A280=0.00. Afterwards, proteins were eluted using a NaCl gradient of 0-1.0 M NaCl in 40 min at a flow rate of 7.5 ml/min. Fractions were assayed for protease activity, supra., and active fractions were pooled. Proteolytically active fractions were diluted with 50% (v/v) 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0) and loaded onto a Pharmacia HR 10/10 Mono Q column equilibrated in 10 mM sodium phosphate. After washing the column with buffer until A280=0.00, proteins were eluted using a NaCl gradient of 0-0.5 M NaCl for 1 h at a flow rate of 2.0 ml/min. Fractions were assayed for protease activity. Those fractions having the greatest amount of phosphoramidon-sensitive protease activity, the phosphoramidon sensitive activity being due to the 41/38 kDa protease, infra., were pooled. These fractions were found to elute at a range of 0.15-0.25 M NaCl. Fractions containing a predominance of phosphoramidon-insensitive protease activity, the 58 kDa protease, were also pooled. These fractions were found to elute at a range of 0.25-0.35 M NaCl. The phosphoramidon-sensitive protease fractions were then concentrated to a final volume of 0.75 ml using a Millipore Ultrafree®-15 centrifugal filter device Biomax-5K NMWL membrane. This material was applied at a flow rate of 0.5 ml/min to a Pharmacia HR 10/30 column that had been packed with Pharmacia Sephadex G-50 equilibrated in 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0)/0.1 M NaCl. Fractions having the maximal phosphoramidon-sensitive protease activity were then pooled and centrifuged over a Millipore Ultrafree®-15 centrifugal filter device Biomax-50K NMWL membrane. Proteolytic activity analysis, supra., indicated this material to have only phosphoramidon-sensitive protease activity. Pooling of the phosphoramidon-insensitive protease, the 58 kDa protein, was followed by concentrating in a Millipore Ultrafree®-15 centrifugal filter device Biomax-50K NMWL membrane and further separation on a Pharmacia Superdex-75 column. Fractions containing the protease were pooled.

[0240] Analysis of purified 58- and 41/38 kDa purified proteases revealed that, while both types of protease were completely inhibited with 1,10 phenanthroline, only the 41/38 kDa protease was inhibited with phosphoramidon. Further analysis of crude broth indicated that protease activity of day 1 W-14 broth has 23% of the total protease activity due to the 41/38 kDa protease, increasing to 44% in day three W-14 broth.

[0241] Standard SDS-PAGE analysis for examining protein purity and obtaining amino terminal sequence was performed using 4-20% gradient MiniPlus SepraGels purchased from Integrated Separation Systems (Natick, Mass.). Proteins to be amino-terminal sequenced were blotted onto PVDF membrane following purification, infra., (ProBlott™ Membranes; Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.), visualized with 0.1% amido black, excised, and sent to Cambridge Prochem; Cambridge, Mass., for sequencing.

[0242] Deduced amino terminal sequence of the 58-(SEQ ID NO:45) and 41/38 kDa (SEQ ID NO:44) proteases from three day old W-14 broth were DV-GSEKANEKLK (SEQ ID NO: 45) and DSGDDDKVTNTDIHR (SEQ ID NO:44), respectively.

[0243] Sequencing of the 41/38 kDa protease revealed several amino termini, each one having an additional amino acid removed by proteolysis. Examination of the primary, secondary, tertiary and quartenary sequences for the 38 and 41 kDa polypeptides allowed for deduction of the sequence shown above and revealed that these two proteases are homologous.

EXAMPLE 11, PART A

Screening of Photorhabdus Genomic Library Via Use of Antibodies for Genes Encoding TcbA Peptide

[0244] In parallel to the sequencing described above, suitable probing and sequencing was done based on the TcbAii peptide (SEQ ID NO:1). This sequencing was performed by preparing bacterial culture broths and purifying the toxin as described in Examples 1 and 2 above.

[0245] Genomic DNA was isolated from the Photorhabdus luminescens strain W-14 grown in Grace's insect tissue culture medium. The bacteria were grown in 5 ml of culture medium in a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask at 28° C. and 250 rpm for approximately 24 hours. Bacterial cells from 100 ml of culture medium were pelleted at 5000×g for 10 minutes. The supernatant was discarded, and the cell pellets then were used for the genomic DNA isolation.

[0246] The genomic DNA was isolated using a modification of the CTAB method described in Section 2.4.3 of Ausubel (supra.). The section entitled “Large Scale CsCl prep of bacterial genomic DNA” was followed through step 6. At this point, an additional chloroform/isoamyl alcohol (24:1) extraction was performed followed by a phenol/chloroform/isoamyl (25:24:1) extraction step and a final chloroform/isoamyl/alcohol (24:1) extraction. The DNA was precipitated by the addition of a 0.6 volume of isopropanol. The precipitated DNA was hooked and wound around the end of a bent glass rod, dipped briefly into 70% ethanol as a final wash, and dissolved in 3 ml of TE buffer.

[0247] The DNA concentration, estimated by optical density at 280/260 nm, was approximately 2 mg/ml.

[0248] Using this genomic DNA, a library was prepared. Approximately 50 μg of genomic DNA was partly digested with Sau3 A1. Then NaCl density gradient centrifugation was used to size fractionate the partially digested DNA fragments. Fractions containing DNA fragments with an average size of 12 kb, or larger, as determined by agarose gel electrophoresis, were ligated into the plasmid BluScript, Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif., and transformed into an E. coli DH5α or DHB10 strain.

[0249] Separately, purified aliquots of the protein were sent to the biotechnology hybridoma center at the University of Wisconsin, Madison for production of monoclonal antibodies to the proteins. The material that was sent was the HPLC purified fraction containing native bands 1 and 2 which had been denatured at 65° C., and 20 μg of which was injected into each of four mice. Stable monoclonal antibody-producing hybridoma cell lines were recovered after spleen cells from unimmunized mouse were fused with a stable myeloma cell line. Monoclonal antibodies were recovered from the hybridomas.

[0250] Separately, polyclonal antibodies were created by taking native agarose gel purified band 1 (see Example 1) protein which was then used to immunize a New Zealand white rabbit. The protein was prepared by excising the band from the native agarose gels, briefly heating the gel pieces to 65° C. to melt the agarose, and immediately emulsifying with adjuvant. Freund's complete adjuvant was used for the primary immunizations and Freund's incomplete was used for 3 additional injections at monthly intervals. For each injection, approximately 0.2 ml of emulsified band 1, containing 50 to 100 micrograms of protein, was delivered by multiple subcontaneous injections into the back of the rabbit. Serum was obtained 10 days after the final injection and additional bleeds were performed at weekly intervals for 3 weeks. The serum complement was inactivated by heating to 56° C. for 15 minutes and then stored at −20° C.

[0251] The monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies were then used to screen the genomic library for the expression of antigens which could be detected by the epitope. Positive clones were detected on nitrocellulose filter colony lifts. An immunoblot analysis of the positive clones was undertaken.

[0252] An analysis of the clones as defined by both immunoblot and Southern analysis resulted in the tentative identification of four genomic regions.

[0253] In the first region was a gene encoding the peptide designated here as TcbAii. Full DNA sequence of this gene (tcbA) was obtained. It is set forth as SEQ ID NO:11. Confirmation that the sequence encodes the internal sequence of SEQ ID NO:1 is demonstrated by the presence of SEQ ID NO:1 at amino acid number 88 from the deduced amino acid sequence created by the open reading frame of SEQ ID NO:11. This can be confirmed by referring to SEQ ID NO:12, which is the deduced amino acid sequence created by SEQ ID NO:11.

[0254] The second region of toxin peptides contains the segments referred to above as TcaBi, TcaBii and TcaC. Following the screening of the library with the polyclonal antisera, this second region of toxin genes was identified by several clones which produced different size proteins, all of which cross-reacted with the polyclonal antibody on an immunoblot and were also found to share DNA homology on a Southern Blot. Sequence comparison revealed that they belonged to the gene complex designated TcaB and TcaC above.

[0255] Two other regions of antibody toxin clones were also isolated in the polyclonal screen. These regions produced proteins that cross-react with a polyclonal antibody and also shared DNA homology with the regions as determined by Southern blotting. Thus, it appears that the Photorhabdus luminescens extracellular protein genes represent a family of genes which are evolutionarily related.

[0256] To further pursue the concept that there might be evolutionarily related variations in the toxin peptides contained within this organism, two approaches have been undertaken to examine other strains of Photorhabdus luminescens for the presence of related proteins. This was done both by PCR amplification of genomic DNA and by immunoblot analysis using the polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies.

[0257] The results indicate that related proteins are produced by Photorhabdus. luminescens strains WX-2, WX-3, WX-4, WX-5, WX-6, WX-7, WX-8, WX-11, WX-12, WX-15 and W-14.

EXAMPLE 11, PART B

Sequence and Analysis of tcc Toxin Clones

[0258] Further DNA sequencing was performed on plasmids isolated from E. coli clones described in Example 11, Part A. The nucleotide sequence from the third region of E. coli clones was shown to be three closely linked open reading frames at this genomic locus. This locus was designated tcc with the three open reading frames designated tccA SEQ ID NO:56, tccB SEQ ID NO:58 and tccc SEQ ID NO:60. The close linkage between these open reading frames is revealed by examination of SEQ ID NO:56, in which 93 bp separate the stop codon of tccA from the start codon of tccb (bases 2992-2994 of SEQ ID NO:56), and by examination of SEQ ID NO:58, in which 131 bases separate the stop codon of tccB and the tccC (bases 4930-4932 of SEQ ID NO:58). The physical map is presented in FIG. 6B.

[0259] The deduced amino acid sequence from the tccA open reading frame indicates that the gene encodes a protein of 105,459 Da. This protein was designated TccA (SEQ ID NO:57). The first 12 amino acids of this protein match the N-terminal sequence obtained from a 108 kDa protein, SEQ ID NO:8, previously identified as part of the toxin complex.

[0260] The deduced amino acid sequence from the tccB open reading frame indicates that this gene encodes a protein of 175,716 Da. This protein was designated TccB (SEQ ID NO:59). The first 11 amino acids of this protein match the N-terminal sequence obtained from a protein with estimated molecular weight of 185 kDa, SEQ ID NO:7. Similarity analysis revealed that the TccB protein is related to the proteins identified as TcbA SEQ ID NO:12; 37% similarity and 28% identity, TcdA SEQ ID NO:47; 35% similarity and 28% identity, and TcaB SEQ ID NO:26; 32% similarity and 26% identity (using the GAP algorithm Wisconsin Package Version 9.0, Genetics Computer Group (GCG) Madison Wis.).

[0261] The deduced amino acid sequence of tccC indicated that this open reading frame encodes a protein of 111,694 Da and the protein product was designated TccC (SEQ ID NO:61)

EXAMPLE 12

Characterization of Photorhabdus Strains

[0262] In order to establish that the collection described herein was comprised of Photorhabdus strains, the strains herein were assessed in terms of recognized microbiological traits that are characteristic of Photorhabdus and which differentiate it from other Enterobacteriaceae and Xenorhabdus spp. (Farmer, J. J. 1984. Bergey's Manual of Systemic Bacteriology, Vol 1. pp. 510-511. (ed. Kreig N. R. and Holt, J. G.). Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore; Akhurst and Boemare, 1988, Boemare et al., 1993). These characteristic traits are as follows: Gram's stain negative rods, organism size of 0.5-2 μm in width and 2-10 μm in length, red/yellow colony pigmentation, presence of crystalline inclusion bodies, presence of catalase, inability to reduce nitrate, presence of bioluminescence, ability to take up dye from growth media, positive for protease production, growth-temperature range below 37° C., survival under anaerobic conditions and positively motile. (Table 20). Reference Escherichia coli, Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus strains were included in all tests for comparison. The overall results are consistent with all strains being part of the family Enterobacteriaceae and the genus Photorhabdus.

[0263] A luminometer was used to establish the bioluminescence of each strain and provide a quantitative and relative measurement of light production. For measurement of relative light emitting units, the broths from each strain (cells and media) were measured at three time intervals after inoculation in liquid culture (6, 12, and 24 hr) and compared to background luminosity (uninoculated media and water). Prior to measuring light emission from the various broths, cell density was established by measuring light absorbance (560 nM) in a Gilford Systems (Oberlin, Ohio) spectrophotometer using a sipper cell. Appropriate dilutions were then made (to normalize optical density to 1.0 unit) before measuring luminosity. Aliquots of the diluted broths were then placed into cuvettes (300 μl each) and read in a Bio-Orbit 1251 Luminometer (Bio-Orbit Oy, Twiku, Finland). The integration period for each sample was 45 seconds. The samples were continuously mixed (spun in baffled cuvettes) while being read to provide oxygen availability. A positive test was determined as being ≧5-fold background luminescence (about 5-10 units). In addition, colony luminosity was detected with photographic film overlays and visually, after adaptation in a darkroom. The Gram's staining characteristics of each strain were established with a commercial Gram's stain kit (BBL, Cockeysville, Md.) used in conjunction with Gram's stain control slides (Fisher Scientific, Pittsburgh, Pa.). Microscopic evaluation was then performed using a Zeiss microscope (Carl Zeiss, Germany) 100× oil immersion objective lens (with 10× ocular and 2× body magnification). Microscopic examination of individual strains for organism size, cellular description and inclusion bodies (the latter after logarithmic growth) was performed using wet mount slides (10× ocular, 2× body and 40× objective magnification) with oil immersion and phase contrast microscopy with a micrometer (Akhurst, R. J. and Boemare, N. E. 1990. Entomopathogenic Nematodes in Biological Control (ed. Gaugler, R. and Kaya, H.). pp. 75-90. CRC Press, Boca Raton, USA.; Baghdiguian S., Boyer-Giglio M. H., Thaler, J. O., Bonnot G., Boemare N. 1993. Biol. Cell 79, 177-185.). Colony pigmentation was observed after inoculation on Bacto nutrient agar, (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) prepared as per label instructions. Incubation occurred at 28° C. and descriptions were produced after 5-7 days. To test for the presence of the enzyme catalase, a colony of the test organism was removed on a small plug from a nutrient agar plate and placed into the bottom of a glass test tube. One ml of a household hydrogen peroxide solution was gently added down the side of the tube. A positive reaction was recorded when bubbles of gas (presumptive oxygen) appeared immediately or within 5 seconds. Controls of uninoculated nutrient agar and hydrogen peroxide solution were also examined. To test for nitrate reduction, each culture was inoculated into 10 ml of Bacto Nitrate Broth (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.). After 24 hours incubation at 28° C., nitrite production was tested by the addition of two drops of sulfanilic acid reagent and two drops of alpha-naphthylamine reagent (see Difco Manual, 10th edition, Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich., 1984). The generation of a distinct pink or red color indicates the formation of nitrite from nitrate. The ability of each strain to uptake dye from growth media was tested with Bacto MacConkey agar containing the dye neutral red; Bacto Tergitol-7 agar containing the dye bromothymol blue and Bacto EMB Agar containing the dye eosin-Y (agars from Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich., all prepared according to label instructions). After inoculation on these media, dye uptake was recorded after incubation at 28° C. for 5 days. Growth on these latter media is characteristic for members of the family Enterobacteriaceae. Motility of each strain was tested using a solution of Bacto Motility Test Medium (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) prepared as per label instructions. A butt-stab inoculation was performed with each strain and motility was judged macroscopically by a diffuse zone of growth spreading from the line of inoculum. In many cases, motility was also observed microscopically from liquid culture under wet mount slides. Biochemical nutrient evaluation for each strain was performed using BBL Enterotube II (Benton, Dickinson, Germany). Product instructions were followed with the exception that incubation was carried out at 28° C. for 5 days. Results were consistent with previously cited reports for Photorhabdus. The production of protease was tested by observing hydrolysis of gelatin using Bacto gelatin (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) plates made as per label instructions. Cultures were inoculated and the plates were incubated at 28° C. for 5 days. To assess growth at different temperatures, agar plates [2% proteose peptone #3 with two percent Bacto-Agar (Difco, Detroit, Mich.) in deionized water] were streaked from a common source of inoculum. Plates were sealed with Nesco® film and incubated at 20, 28 and 37° C. for up to three weeks. Plates showing no growth at 37° C. showed no cell viability after transfer to a 28° C. incubator for one week. Oxygen requirements for Photorhabdus strains were tested in the following manner. A butt-stab inoculation into fluid thioglycolate broth medium (Difco, Detroit, Mich.) was made. The tubes were incubated at room temperature for one week and cultures were then examined for type and extent of growth. The indicator resazurin demonstrates the level of medium oxidation or the aerobiosis zone (Difco Manual, 10th edition, Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.). Growth zone results obtained for the Photorhabdus strains tested were consistent with those of a facultative anaerobic microorganism.

TABLE 19

Taxonomic Traits of Photorhabdus Strains

Traits Assessed*

Strain

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

W-14

−†

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-1

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-2

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-3

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

YT

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-4

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

YT

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-5

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

LO

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-6

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

LY

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-7

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

R

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-8

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-9

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

YT

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-10

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Ro

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-11

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Ro

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-12

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-14

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

LR

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WX-15

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

LR

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

H9

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

LY

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

Hb

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

YT

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

Hm

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

TY

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

HP88

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

LY

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

NC-1

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

W30

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

YT

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

WIR

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

RO

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

B2

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

R

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

43948

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

43949

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

43950

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

43951

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

43952

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

*A = Gram's stain, B = Crystaline inclusion bodies, C = Bioluminescence, D = Cell form, E = Motility, F = Nitrate reduction, G = Presence of catalase, H = Gelatin hydrolysis, I = Dye uptake, J = Pigmentation, K = Growth on EMB agar, L = Growth on MacConkey agar, M = Growth on Tergitol-7 agar, N = Facultative anaerobe, O = Growth at 20° C., P = Growth at 28° C., Q = Growth at 37° C.,

†+/− = positive or negative for trait,

rd = rod,

S = sized within Genus descriptors,

RO = red-orange,

LR = light red,

R = red,

O = orange,

Y = yellow,

T = tan,

LY = light yellow,

YT = yellow tan, and

LO = light orange.

[0264] Cellular fatty acid analysis is a recognized tool for bacterial characterization at the genus and species level (Tornabene, T. G. 1985. Lipid Analysis and the Relationship to Chemotaxonomy in Methods in Microbiology, Vol. 18, 209-234.; Goodfellow, M. and O'Donnell, A. G. 1993. Roots of Bacterial Systematics in Handbook of New Bacterial Systematics (ed. Goodfellow, M. & O'Donnell, A. G.) pp. 3-54. London: Academic Press Ltd.), these references are incorporated herein by reference, and were used to confirm that our collection was related at the genus level. Cultures were shipped to an external, contract laboratory for fatty acid methyl ester analysis (FAME) using a Microbial ID (MIDI, Newark, Del., USA) Microbial Identification System (MIS). The MIS system consists of a Hewlett Packard HP5890A gas chromatograph with a 25 mm×0.2 mm 5% methylphenyl silicone fused silica capillary column. Hydrogen is used as the carrier gas and a flame-ionization detector functions in conjunction with an automatic sampler, integrator and computer. The computer compares the sample fatty acid methyl esters to a microbial fatty acid library and against a calibration mix of known fatty acids. As selected by the contract laboratory, strains were grown for 24 hours at 28° C. on trypticase soy agar prior to analysis. Extraction of samples was performed by the contract lab as per standard FAME methodology. There was no direct identification of the strains to any luminescent bacterial group other than Photorhabdus. When the cluster analysis was performed, which compares the fatty acid profiles of a group of isolates, the strain fatty acid profiles were related at the genus level.

[0265] The evolutionary diversity of the Photorhabdus strains in our collection was measured by analysis of PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction) mediated genomic fingerprinting using genomic DNA from each strain. This technique is based on families of repetitive DNA sequences present throughout the genome of diverse bacterial species (reviewed by Versalovic, J., Schneider, M., D E Bruijn, F. J. and Lupski, J. R. 1994. Methods Mol. Cell. Biol., 5, 25-40.). Three of these, repetitive extragenic palindromic sequence (REP), enterobacterial repetitive intergenic consensus (ERIC) and the BOX element are thought to play an important role in the organization of the bacterial genome. Genomic organization is believed to be shaped by selection and the differential dispersion of these elements within the genome of closely related bacterial strains can be used to discriminate these strains (e.g., Louws, F. J., Fulbright, D. W., Stephens, C. T. and D E Bruijn, F. J. 1994. Appl. Environ. Micro. 60, 2286-2295). Rep-PCR utilizes oligonucleotide primers complementary to these repetitive sequences to amplify the variably sized DNA fragments lying between them. The resulting products are separated by electrophoresis to establish the DNA “fingerprint” for each strain.

[0266] To isolate genomic DNA from our strains, cell pellets were resuspended in TE buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 8.0) to a final volume of 10 ml and 12 ml of 5 M NaCl was then added. This mixture was centrifuged 20 min. at 15,000×g. The resulting pellet was resuspended in 5.7 ml of TE and 300 μl of 10% SDS and 60 μl 20 mg/ml proteinase K (Gibco BRL Products, Grand Island, N.Y.) were added. This mixture was incubated at 37° C. for 1 hr, approximately 10 mg of lysozyme was then added and the mixture was incubated for an additional 45 min. One milliliter of 5M NaCl and 800 μl of CTAB/NaCl solution (10% w/v CTAB, 0.7 M NaCl) were then added and the mixture was incubated 10 min. at 65° C., gently agitated, then incubated and agitated for an additional 20 min. to aid in clearing of the cellular material. An equal volume of chloroform/isoamyl alcohol solution (24:1, v/v) was added, mixed gently then centrifuged. Two extractions were then performed with an equal volume of phenol/chloroform/isoamyl alcohol (50:49:1). Genomic DNA was precipitated with 0.6 volume of isopropanol. Precipitated DNA was removed with a glass rod, washed twice with 70% ethanol, dried and dissolved in 2 ml of STE (10 mM Tris-HCl pH8.0, 10 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA). The DNA was then quantitated by optical density at 260 nm. To perform rep-PCR analysis of Photorhabdus genomic DNA the following primers were used, REP1R-I; 5′-IIIICGICGICATCIGGC-3′ and REP2-I; 5′-ICGICTTATCIGGCCTAC-3′. PCR was performed using the following 25 μl reaction: 7.75 μl H2O, 2.5 μl 10×LA buffer (PanVera Corp., Madison, Wis.), 16 μl dNTP mix (2.5 mM each), 1 μl of each primer at 50 pM/μl, 1 μl DMSO, 1.5 μl genomic DNA (concentrations ranged from 0.075-0.480 μg/μl) and 0.25 μl TaKaRa EX Taq (PanVera Corp., Madison, Wis.). The PCR amplification was performed in a Perkin Elmer DNA Thermal Cycler (Norwalk, Conn.) using the following conditions: 95° C./7 min. then 35 cycles of; 94° C./1 min., 44° C./1 min., 65° C./8 min., followed by 15 min. at 65° C. After cycling, the 25 μl reaction was added to 5 μl of 6×gel loading buffer (0.25% bromophenol blue, 40% w/v sucrose in H2O). A 15×20 cm 1%-agarose gel was then run in TBE buffer (0.09 M Tris-borate, 0.002 M EDTA) using 8 μl of each reaction. The gel was run for approximately 16 hours at 45 v. Gels were then stained in 20 μg/ml ethidium bromide for 1 hour and destained in TBE buffer for approximately 3 hours. Polaroid® photographs of the gels were then taken under UV illumination.

[0267] The presence or absence of bands at specific sizes for each strain was scored from the photographs and entered as a similarity matrix in the numerical taxonomy software program, NTSYS-pc (Exeter Software, Setauket, N.Y.). Controls of E. coli strain HB101 and Xanthomonas oryzae pv. oryzae assayed at the same time produced PCR “fingerprints” corresponding to published reports (Versalovic, J., Koeuth, T. and Lupski, J. R. 1991. Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 6823-6831; Vera Cruz, C. M., Halda-Alija, L., Louws, F., Skinner, D. Z., George, M. L., Nelson, R. J., D E Bruijn, F. J., Rice, C. and Leach, J. E. 1995. Int. Rice Res. Notes, 20, 23-24.; Vera Cruz, C. M., Ardales, E. Y., Skinner, D. Z., Talag, J., Nelson, R. J., Louws, F. J., Leung, H., Mew, T. W. and Leach, J. E. 1996. Phytopathology (in press, respectively). The data from Photorhabdus strains were then analyzed with a series of programs within NTSYS-pc; SIMQUAL (Similarity for Qualitative data) to generate a matrix of similarity coefficients (using the Jaccard coefficient) and SAHN (Sequential, Agglomerative, Heirarchical and Nested) clustering [using the UPGMA (Unweighted Pair-Group Method with Arithmetic Averages) method] which groups related strains and can be expressed as a phenogram (FIG. 5). The COPH (cophenetic values) and MXCOMP (matrix comparison) programs were used to generate a cophenetic value matrix and compare the correlation between this and the original matrix upon which the clustering was based. A resulting normalized Mantel statistic (r) was generated which is a measure of the goodness of fit for a cluster analysis (r=0.8-0.9 represents a very good fit). In our case r=0.919. Therefore, our collection is comprised of a diverse group of easily distinguishable strains representative of the Photorhabdus genus.

EXAMPLE 13

Insecticidal Utility of Toxin(s) Produced by Various Photorhabdus Strains

[0268] Initial “seed” cultures of the various Photorhabdus strains were produced by inoculating 175 ml of 2% Proteose Peptone #3 (PP3) (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) liquid media with a primary variant subclone in a 500 ml tribaffled flask with a Delong neck, covered with a Kaput. Inoculum for each seed culture was derived from oil-overlay agar slant cultures or plate cultures. After inoculation, these flasks were incubated for 16 hrs at 28° C. on a rotary shaker at 150 rpm. These seed cultures were then used as uniform inoculum sources for a given fermentation of each strain. Additionally, overlaying the post-log seed culture with sterile mineral oil, adding a sterile magnetic stir bar for future resuspension and storing the culture in the dark, at room temperature provided long-term preservation of inoculum in a toxin-competent state. The production broths were inoculated by adding 1% of the actively growing seed culture to fresh 2% PP3 media (e.g., 1.75 ml per 175 ml fresh media). Production of broths occurred in either 500 ml tribaffled flasks (see above), or 2800 ml baffled, convex bottom flasks (500 ml volume) covered by a silicon foam closure. Production flasks were incubated for 24-48 hrs under the above mentioned conditions. Following incubation, the broths were dispensed into sterile 1 L polyethylene bottles, spun at 2600×g for 1 hr at 10° C. and decanted from the cell and debris pellet. The liquid broth was then vacuum filtered through Whatman GF/D (2.7 μM retention) and GF/B (1.0 μM retention) glass filters to remove debris. Further broth clarification was achieved with a tangential flow microfiltration device (Pall Filtron, Northborough, Mass.) using a 0.5 μM open-channel filter. When necessary, additional clarification could be obtained by chilling the broth (to 4° C.) and centrifuging for several hours at 2600×g. Following these procedures, the broth was filter sterilized using a 0.2 μM nitrocellulose membrane filter. Sterile broths were then used directly for biological assay, biochemical analysis or concentrated (up to 15-fold) using a 10,000 MW cut-off, M12 ultra-filtration device (Amicon, Beverly Mass.) or centrifugal concentrators (Millipore, Bedford, Mass. and Pall Filtron, Northborough, Mass.) with a 10,000 MW pore size. In the case of centrifugal concentrators, the broth was spun at 2000×g for approximately 2 hr. The 10,000 MW permeate was added to the corresponding retentate to achieve the desired concentration of components greater than 10,000 MW. Heat inactivation of processed broth samples was acheived by heating the samples at 100° C. in a sand-filled heat block for 10 minutes.

[0269] The broth(s) and toxin complex(es) from different Photorhabdus strains are useful for reducing populations of insects and were used in a method of inhibiting an insect population which comprises applying to a locus of the insect an effective insect inactivating amount of the active described. A demonstration of the breadth of insecticidal activity observed from broths of a selected group of Photorhabdus strains fermented as described above is shown in Table 20. It is possible that additional insecticidal activities could be detected with these strains through increased concentration of the broth or by employing different fermentation methods. Consistent with the activity being associated with a protein, the insecticidal activity of all strains tested was heat labile (see above).

[0270] Culture broth(s) from diverse Photorhabdus strains show differential insecticidal activity (mortality and/or growth inhibition, reduced adult emergence) against a number of insects. More specifically, the activity is seen against corn rootworm larvae and boll weevil larvae which are members of the insect order Coleoptera. Other members of the Coleoptera include wireworms, pollen beetles, flea beetles, seed beetles and Colorado potato beetle. Activity is also observed against aster leafhopper and corn plant hopper, which are members of the order Homoptera. Other members of the Homoptera include planthoppers, pear psylla, apple sucker, scale insects, whiteflies, spittle bugs as well as numerous host specific aphid species. The broths and purified toxin complex(es) are also active against tobacco budworm, tobacco hornworm and European corn borer which are members of the order Lepidoptera. Other typical members of this order are beet armyworm, cabbage looper, black cutworm, corn earworm, codling moth, clothes moth, Indian mealmoth, leaf rollers, cabbage worm, cotton bollworm, bagworm, Eastern tent caterpillar, sod webworm and fall armyworm. Activity is also seen against fruitfly and mosquito larvae which are members of the order Diptera. Other members of the order Diptera are, pea midge, carrot fly, cabbage root fly, turnip root fly, onion fly, crane fly and house fly and various mosquito species. Activity with broth(s) and toxin complex(es) is also seen against two-spotted spider mite which is a member of the order Acarina which includes strawberry spider mites, broad mites, citrus red mite, European red mite, pear rust mite and tomato russet mite.

[0271] Activity against corn rootworm larvae was tested as follows. Photorhabdus culture broth(s) (0-15 fold concentrated, filter sterilized), 2% Proteose Peptone #3, purified toxin complex(es), 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 were applied directly to the surface (about 1.5 cm2) of artificial diet (Rose, R. I. and McCabe, J. M. (1973). J. Econ. Entomol. 66, (398-400) in 40 μl aliquots. Toxin complex was diluted in 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and the wells were infested with single, neonate Diabrotica undecimpunctata howardi (Southern corn rootworm, SCR) hatched from surface sterilized eggs. The plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained at 27° C. for the appropriate period (3-5 days). Mortality and larval weight determinations were then scored. Generally, 16 insects per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortality was generally less than 5%.

[0272] Activity against boll weevil (Anthomonas grandis) was tested as follows. Concentrated (1-10 fold) Photorhabdus broths, control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3), purified toxin complex(es) [0.23 mg/ml] or 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 were applied in 60 μl aliquots to the surface of 0.35 g of artificial diet (Stoneville Yellow lepidopteran diet) and allowed to dry. A single, 12-24 hr boll weevil larva was placed on the diet, and the wells were sealed and held at 25° C., 50% RH for 5 days. Mortality and larval weights were then assessed. Control mortality ranged between 0-13%.

[0273] Activity against mosquito larvae was tested as follows. The assay was conducted in a 96-well microtiter plate. Each well contained 200 μl of aqueous solution (10-fold concentrated Photorhabdus culture broth(s), control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3), 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, toxin complex(es) @ 0.23 mg/ml or H2O) and approximately 20, 1-day old larvae (Aedes aegypti). There were 6 wells per treatment. The results were read at 3-4 days after infestation. Control mortality was between 0-20%.

[0274] Activity against fruitflies was tested as follows. Purchased Drosophila melanogaster medium was prepared using 50% dry medium and a 50% liquid of either water, control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3), 10-fold concentrated Photorhabdus culture broth(s), purified toxin complex(es) [0.23 mg/ml] or 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer , pH 7.0. This was accomplished by placing 4.0 ml of dry medium in each of 3 rearing vials per treatment and adding 4.0 ml of the appropriate liquid. Ten late instar Drosophila melanogaster maggots were then added to each 25 ml vial. The vials were held on a laboratory bench, at room temperature, under fluorescent ceiling lights. Pupal or adult counts were made after 15 days of exposure. Adult emergence as compared to water and control medium (0-16% reduction).

[0275] Activity against aster leafhopper adults (Macrosteles severini) and corn planthopper nymphs (Peregrinus maidis) was tested with an ingestion assay designed to allow ingestion of the active without other external contact. The reservoir for the active/“food” solution is made by making 2 holes in the center of the bottom portion of a 35×10 mm Petri dish. A 2 inch Parafilm M® square is placed across the top of the dish and secured with an “O” ring. A 1 oz. plastic cup is then infested with approximately 7 hoppers and the reservoir is placed on top of the cup, Parafilm down. The test solution is then added to the reservoir through the holes. In tests using 10-fold concentrated Photorhabdus culture broth(s), the broth and control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3) were dialyzed against 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 and sucrose (to 5%) was added to the resulting solution to reduce control mortality. Purified toxin complex(es) [0.23 mg/ml] or 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 was also tested. Mortality is reported at day 3. The assay was held in an incubator at 28° C., 70% RH with a 16/8 photoperiod. The assays were graded for mortality at 72 hours. Control mortality was less than 6%.

[0276] Activity against lepidopteran larvae was tested as follows. Concentrated (10-fold) Photorhabdus culture broth(s), control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3), purified toxin complex(es) [0.23 mg/ml] or 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 were applied directly to the surface (about 1.5 cm2) of standard artificial lepidopteran diet (Stoneville Yellow diet) in 40 μl aliquots. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and each well was infested with a single, neonate larva. European corn borer (Ostrinia nubilalis) and tobacco hornworm (Manduca sexta) eggs were obtained from commercial sources and hatched in-house, whereas tobacco budworm (Heliothis virescens) larvae were supplied internally. Following infestation with larvae, the diet plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained in the dark at 27° C. for the appropriate period. Mortality and weight determinations were scored at day 5. Generally, 16 insects per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortality generally ranged from about 4 to about 12.5% for control medium and was less than 10% for phosphate buffer.

[0277] Activity against two-spotted spider mite (Tetranychus urticae) was determined as follows. Young squash plants were trimmed to a single cotyledon and sprayed to run-off with 10-fold concentrated broth(s), control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3), purified toxin complex(es), 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0. After drying, the plants were infested with a mixed population of spider mites and held at lab temperature and humidity for 72 hr. Live mites were then counted to determine levels of control.

TABLE 20
Observed Insecticidal Spectrum of Broths from
Different Photorhabdus Strains
Photorhabdus Strain Sensitive* Insect Species
WX-1                3**, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
WX-2                2, 4
WX-3                1, 4
WX-4                1, 4
WX-5                4
WX-6                4
WX-7                3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
WX-8                1, 2, 4
WX-9                1, 2, 4
WX-10               4
WX-11               1, 2, 4
WX-12               2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
WX-14               1, 2, 4
WX-15               1, 2, 4
W30                 3, 4, 5, 8
NC-1                1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
WIR                 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8
HP88                1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8
Hb                  3, 4, 5, 7, 8
Hm                  1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8
H9                  1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
W-14                1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10
ATCC 43948          4
ATCC 43949          4
ATCC 43950          4
ATCC 43951          4
ATCC 43952          4
*= ≧25% mortality and/or growth inhibition vs. control
**= 1; Tobacco budworm, 2; European corn borer, 3; Tobacco hornworm, 4; Southern corn rootworm, 5; Boll weevil, 6; Mosquito, 7; Fruit Fly, 8; Aster Leafhopper, 9; Corn planthopper, 10; Two-spotted spider mite.

EXAMPLE 14

Non W-14 Photorhabdus Strains: Purification, Characterization and Activity Spectrum

[0278] Purification

[0279] The protocol, as follows, is similar to that developed for the purification of W-14 and was established based on purifying those fractions having the most activity against Southern corn root worm (SCR), as determined in bioassays (see Example 13). Typically, 4-20 L of broth that had been filtered, as described in Example 13, were received and concentrated using an Amicon spiral ultra filtration cartridge Type S1Y100 attached to an Amicon M-12 filtration device. The retentate contained native proteins consisting of molecular sizes greater than 100 kDa, whereas the flow through material contained native proteins less than 100 kDa in size. The majority of the activity against SCR was contained in the 100 kDa retentate. The retentate was then continually diafiltered with 10 mM sodium phosphate (pH=7.0) until the filtrate reached an A280<0.100. Unless otherwise stated, all procedures from this point were performed in buffer as defined by 10 mM sodium phosphate (pH 7.0). The retentate was then concentrated to a final volume of approximately 0.20 L and filtered using a 0.45 mm Nalgene™ Filterware sterile filtration unit. The filtered material was loaded at 7.5 ml/min onto a Pharmacia HR16/10 column which had been packed with PerSeptive Biosystem Poros® 50 HQ strong anion exchange matrix equilibrated in buffer using a PerSeptive Biosystem Sprint® HPLC system. After loading, the column was washed with buffer until an A280<0.100 was achieved. Proteins were then eluted from the column at 2.5 ml/min using buffer with 0.4 M NaCl for 20 min for a total volume of 50 ml. The column was then washed using buffer with 1.0 M NaCl at the same flow rate for an additional 20 min (final volume=50 ml). Proteins eluted with 0.4 M and 1.0 M NaCl were placed in separate dialysis bags (Spectra/Por® Membrane MWCO: 2,000) and allowed to dialyze overnight at 4° C. in 12 L buffer. The majority of the activity against SCR was contained in the 0.4 M fraction. The 0.4 M fraction was further purified by application of 20 ml to a Pharmacia XK 26/100 column that had been prepacked with Sepharose CL4B (Pharmacia) using a flow rate of 0.75 ml/min. Fractions were pooled based on A280 peak profile and concentrated to a final volume of 0.75 ml using a Millipore Ultrafree®-15 centrifugal filter device Biomax-50K NMWL membrane. Protein concentrations were determined using a Biorad Protein Assay Kit with bovine gamma globulin as a standard.

[0280] Characterization

[0281] The native molecular weight of the SCR toxin complex was determined using a Pharmacia HR 16/50 that had been prepacked with Sepharose CL4B in buffer. The column was then calibrated using proteins of known molecular size thereby allowing for calculation of the toxin approximate native molecular size. As shown in Table 21, the molecular size of the toxin complex ranged from 777 kDa with strain Hb to 1,900 kDa with strain WX-14. The yield of toxin complex also varied, from strain WX-12 producing 0.8 mg/L to strain Hb, which produced 7.0 mg/L.

[0282] Proteins found in the toxin complex were examined for individual polypeptide size using SDS-PAGE analysis. Typically, 20 mg protein of the toxin complex from each strain was loaded onto a 2-15% polyacrylamide gel (Integrated Separation Systems) and electrophoresed at 20 mA in Biorad SDS-PAGE buffer. After completion of electrophoresis, the gels were stained overnight in Biorad Coomassie blue R-250 (0.2% in methanol: acetic acid: water; 40:10:40 v/v/v). Subsequently, gels were destained in methanol:acetic acid:water; 40:10:40 (v/v/v). The gels were then rinsed with water for 15 min and scanned using a Molecular Dynamics Personal Laser Densitometer®. Lanes were quantitated and molecular sizes were calculated as compared to Biorad high molecular weight standards, which ranged from 200-45 kDa.

[0283] Sizes of the individual polypeptides comprising the SCR toxin complex from each strain are listed in Table 22. The sizes of the individual polypeptides ranged from 230 kDa with strain WX-1 to a size of 16 kDa, as seen with strain WX-7. Every strain, with the exception of strain Hb, had polypeptides comprising the toxin complex that were in the 160-230 kDa range, the 100-160 kDa range, and the 50-80 kDa range. These data indicate that the toxin complex may vary in peptide composition and components from strain to strain, however, in all cases the toxin attributes appears to consist of a large, oligomeric protein complex.

TABLE 21
Characterization of a Toxin Complex from
Non W-14 Photorhabdus Strains
			Yield
		Approx.	Active
		Native	Fraction
	Strain	Molecular wt.a	(mg/L)b
	H9	972,000	1.8
	Hb	777,000	7.0
	Hm	1,400,000	1.1
	HP88	813,000	2.5
	NCl	1,092,000	3.3
	WIR	979,000	1.0
	WX-1	973,000	0.8
	WX-2	951,000	2.2
	WX-7	1,000,000	1.5
	WX-12	898,000	0.4
	WX-14	1,900,000	1.9
	W-14	860,000	7.5
	aNative molecular weight determined using a Pharmacia HR 16/50 column packed with Sepharose CL4B
	bAmount of toxin complex recovered from culture broth.

[0284] Activity Spectrum

[0285] As shown in Table 23, the toxin complexes purified from strains Hm and H9 were tested for activity against a variety of insects, with the toxin complex from strain W-14 for comparison. The assays were performed as described in Example 13. The toxin complex from all three strains exhibited activity against tobacco bud worm, European corn borer, Southern corn root worm, and aster leafhopper. Furthermore, the toxin complex from strains Hm and W-14 also exhibited activity against two-spotted spider mite. In addition, the toxin complex from W-14 exhibited activity against mosquito larvae. These data indicate that the toxin complex, while having similarities in activities between certain orders of insects, can also exhibit differential activities against other orders of insects.

TABLE 22
The Approximate Sizes (in kDa) of Peptides in a Purified
Toxin Complex From Non W-14 Photorhabdus
H9	Hb	Hm	HP 88	NC-1	WIR	WX-1	WX-2	WX-7	WX-12	WX-14	W-14
180	150	170	170	180	170	230	200	200	180	210	190
170	140	140	160	170	160	190	170	180	160	180	180
160	139	100	140	140	120	170	150	110	140	160	170
140	130	81	130	110	110	160	120	87	139	120	160
120	120	72	129	44	89	110	110	75	130	110	150
98	100	68	110	16	79	98	82	43	110	100	130
87	98	49	100		74	76	64	33	92	95	120
84	88	46	86		62	58	37	28	87	80	110
79	81	30	81		51	53	30	26	80	69	93
72	75	22	77		40	41		23	73	49	90
68	69	20	73		39	35		22	59	41	77
60	60	19	60		37	31		21	56	33	69
57	57		58		33	28		19	51		65
52	54		45		30	24		18	37		63
46	49		39		28	22		16	33		60
40	44		35		27				32		51
37	39				25				26		46
	37				23						40
	35										39
											29

[0286]

TABLE 23
Observed Insecticidal Spectrum of a Purified Toxin Complex from
Photorhabdus Strains
Photorhabdus Strain Sensitive* Insect Species
Hm Toxin Complex    1**, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8
H9 Toxin Complex    1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8
W-14 Toxin Complex  1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
*= >25% mortality or growth inhibition
*= >25% mortality or growth inhibition
**= 1, Tobacco bud worm; 2, European corn borer; 3, Southern corn root worm; 4, Mosquito; 5, Two-spotted spider mite; 6, Aster Leafhopper; 7, Fruit Fly; 8, Boll Weevil

EXAMPLE 15

Sub-Fractionation of Photorhabdus Protein Toxin Complex

[0287] The Photorhabdus protein toxin complex was isolated as described in Example 14. Next, about 10 mg toxin was applied to a MonoQ 5/5 column equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at a flow rate of 1 ml/min. The column was washed with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 until the optical density at 280 nm returned to baseline absorbance. The proteins bound to the column were eluted with a linear gradient of 0 to 1.0 M NaCl in 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at 1 ml/min for 30 min. One ml fractions were collected and subjected to Southern corn rootworm (SCR) bioassay (see Example 13). Peaks of activity were determined by a series of dilutions of each fraction in SCR bioassays. Two activity peaks against SCR were observed and were named A (eluted at about 0.2-0.3 M NaCl) and B (eluted at 0.3-0.4 M NaCl). Activity peaks A and B were pooled separately and both peaks were further purified using a 3-step procedure described below.

[0288] Solid (NH4)2SO4 was added to the above protein fraction to a final concentration of 1.7 M. Proteins were then applied to a phenyl-Superose 5/5 column equilibrated with 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4 in 50 mM potassium phosphate buffer, pH 7 at 1 ml/min. Proteins bound to the column were eluted with a linear gradient of 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4, 0% ethylene glycol, 50 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 to 25% ethylene glycol, 25 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 (no (NH4)2SO4) at 0.5 ml/min. Fractions were dialyzed overnight against 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0. Activities in each fraction against SCR were determined by bioassay.

[0289] The fractions with the highest activity were pooled and applied to a MonoQ 5/5 column which was equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at 1 ml/min. The proteins bound to the column were eluted at 1 ml/min by a linear gradient of 0 to 1M NaCl in 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0.

[0290] For the final step of purification, the most active fractions above (determined by SCR bioassay) were pooled and subjected to a second phenyl-Superose 5/5/ column. Solid (NH4)2SO4 was added to a final concentration of 1.7 M. The solution was then loaded onto the column equilibrated with 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4 in 50 mM potassium phosphate buffer, pH 7 at 1 ml/min. Proteins bound to the column were eluted with a linear gradient of 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4, 50 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 to 10 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 at 0.5 ml/min. Fractions were dialyzed overnight against 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0. Activities in each fraction against SCR were determined by bioassay.

[0291] The final purified protein by the above 3-step procedure from peak A was named toxin A and the final purified protein from peak B was named toxin B.

[0292] Characterization and Amino Acid Sequencing of Toxin A and Toxin B

[0293] In SDS-PAGE, both toxin A and toxin B contained two major (>90% of total Commassie stained protein) peptides: 192 kDa (named A1 and B1, respectively) and 58 kDa (named A2 and B2, respectively). Both toxin A and toxin B revealed only one major band in native PAGE, indicating A1 and A2 were subunits of one protein complex, and B1 and B2 were subunits of one protein complex. Further, the native molecular weight of both toxin A and toxin B were determined to be 860 kDa by gel filtration chromatography. The relative molar concentrations of A1 to A2 was judged to be a 1 to 1 equivalence as determined by densiometric analysis of SDS-PAGE gels. Similarly, B1 and B2 peptides were present at the same molar concentration.

[0294] Toxin A and toxin B were electrophoresed in 10% SDS-PAGE and transblotted to PVDF membranes. Blots were sent for amino acid analysis and N-terminal amino acid sequencing at Harvard MicroChem and Cambridge ProChem, respectively. The N-terminal amino sequence of B1 was determined to be identical to SEQ ID NO:1, the TcbAii region of the tcbA gene (SEQ ID NO:12, position 87 to 99). A unique N-terminal sequence was obtained for peptide B2 (SEQ ID NO:40). The N-terminal amino acid sequence of peptide B2 was identical to the TcbAiii region of the derived amino acid sequence for the tcbA gene (SEQ ID NO:12, position 1935 to 1945). Therefore, the B toxin contained predominantly two peptides, TcbAii and TcbAiii, that were observed to be derived from the same gene product, TcbA.

[0295] The N-terminal sequence of A2 (SEQ ID NO:41) was unique in comparison to the TcbAiii peptide and other peptides. The A2 peptide was denoted TcdAiii (see Example 17). SEQ ID NO:6 was determined to be a mixture of amino acid sequences SEQ ID NO:40 and 41.

[0296] Peptides A1 and A2 were further subjected to internal amino acid sequencing. For internal amino acid sequencing, 10 μg of toxin A was electrophoresized in 10% SDS-PAGE and transblotted to PVDF membrane. After the blot was stained with amido black, peptides A1 and A2, denoted TcdAii and TcdAiii, respectively, were excised from the blot and sent to Harvard MicroChem and Cambridge ProChem. Peptides were subjected to trypsin digestion followed by HPLC chromatography to separate individual peptides. N-terminal amino acid analysis was performed on selected tryptic peptide fragments. Two internal amino acid sequences of peptide A1 (TcdAii-PK71, SEQ ID NO:38 and TcdAii-PK44, SEQ ID NO:39) were found to have significant homologies with deduced amino acid sequences of the TcbAii region of the tcbA gene (SEQ ID NO:12). Similarly, the N-terminal sequence (SEQ ID NO:41) and two internal sequences of peptides A2 (TcdAiii-PK57, SEQ ID NO:42 and TcdAiii-PK20, SEQ ID NO.43) also showed significant homology with deduced amino acid sequences of TcbAiii region of the tcbA gene (SEQ ID NO:12).

[0297] In summary of above results, the toxin complex has at least two active protein toxin complexes against SCR; toxin A and toxin B. Toxin A and toxin B are similar in their native and subunits molecular weight, however, their peptide compositions are different. Toxin A contained peptides TcdAii and TcdAiii as the major peptides and the toxin B contains TcbAii and TcbAiii as the major peptides.

[0298] Purification and Characterization of Toxin C, Tca Peptides

[0299] The Photorhabdus protein toxin complex was isolated as described above. Next, about 50 mg toxin was applied to a MonoQ 10/10 column equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at a flow rate of 2 ml/min. The column was washed with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH7.0 until the optical density at 280 nm returned to baseline level. The proteins bound to the column were eluted with a linear gradient of 0 to 1M NaCl in 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at 2 ml/min for 60 min. 2 ml fractions were collected and subjected to Western analysis using pAb TcaBii-syn antibody (see Example 21) as the primary antibody. Fractions reacted with pAb TcaBii-syn antibody were combined and solid (NH4)2SO4 was added to a final concentration of 1.7 M. Proteins were then applied to a phenyl-Superose 10/10 column equilibrated with 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4 in 50 mM potassium phosphate buffer, pH 7 at 1 ml/min. Proteins bound to the column were eluted with a linear gradient of 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4, 50 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 to 10 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 at 1 ml/min for 120 min. 2 ml Fractions were collected, dialyzed overnight against 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0, and analyzed by Western blots using pAb TcaBii-syn antibody as the primary antibody.

[0300] Fractions cross-reacted with the antibody were pooled and applied to a MonoQ 5/5 column which was equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at 1 ml/min. The proteins bound to the column were eluted at 1 ml/min by a linear gradient of 0 to 1M NaCl in 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 for 30 min.

[0301] Fractions above reacted with pAb TcaBii-syn antibody were pooled and subjected to a phenyl-Superose 5/5/ column. Solid (NH4)2SO4 added to a final concentration of 1.7 M. The solution was then applied onto the column equilibrated with 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4 in 50 mM potassium phosphate buffer, pH 7 at 1 ml/min. Proteins bound to the column were then eluted with a linear gradient of 1.7 M (NH4)2SO4, 50 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 to 10 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 at 0.5 ml/min for 60 min. Fractions were dialyzed overnight against 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0.

[0302] For the final purification step, fractions reacted with pAb TcaBii-syn antibody above determined by Western analysis were combined and applied to a Mono Q 5/5 column equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 at 1 ml/min. The proteins bound to the column were eluted at 1 ml/min by a linear gradient of 0 to 1M NaCl in 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 for 30 min.

[0303] The final purified protein fraction contained 6 major peptides examined by SDS-PAGE: 165 kDa, 90 kDa, 64 kDa, 62 kDa, 58 kDa, and 22 kDa. The LD50 of the insecticidal activities of this purified fraction were determined to be 100 ng and 500 ng against SCR and ECB, respectively.

[0304] The above peptides were blotted to PVDF membranes and blots were sent for amino acids analysis and 5 amino acid long N-terminal sequencing at Harvard MicroChem and Cambridge ProChem, respectively. The N-terminal amino acid sequence of the 165 kDa peptide was determined to be identical to peptide TcaC (SEQ ID 2, position 1 to 5). The N-terminal amino acid sequence of the 90 kDa peptide was determined to be TcaAii region of the derived amino acid sequence for the tcaA gene (SEQ ID NO 33, position 254 to 258). The N-terminal amino acid sequence of 64 kDa peptide was determined to be identical to peptide TcaBi (SEQ ID 3, position 1 to 5). The N-terminal amino acid sequence of the 62 kDa peptide was determined to be TcaAii region of the derived amino acid sequence for the tcaA gene (SEQ ID NO 33, position 489 to 493). The N-terminal amino acid sequence of 58 kDa peptide was determined to be identical to peptide TcaBii (SEQ ID 5, position 1 to 5). The N-terminal amino acid sequence of the 22 kDa peptide (SEQ ID NO 62) was determined to be TcaAi region, denoted TcaAiv, of the derived amino acid sequence for the tcaA gene (SEQ ID NO 34, position 98 to 102). It is noted that all tcaA, tcaB, and tcaC genes reside in the same tca operon (FIG. 6A).

[0305] Five μg of purified Tca fraction, purified toxin A, and purified toxin B were analyzed by Western blot using the following antibodies individually as primary antibody: pAb TcaBii-syn antibody, mAb CF52 antibody, pAb TcdAii-syn antibody, and pAb Tcdiii-syn antibody (Example 21). With pAb TcaBii-syn antibody only the purified Tca peptides fraction reacted, but not toxin A or toxin B. With mAb CF52 antibody, only toxin B reacted but not Tca peptides fraction or toxin A. With either pAb TcdAii-syn antibody or pAb Tcdiii-syr antibody only toxin A reacted, but not Tca peptides fraction or toxin B. This indicated that the insecticidal activity observed in the purified Tca peptides fraction is independent of toxin A and toxin B. The purified Tca peptide fraction is a third unique protein toxin, denoted toxin C.

EXAMPLE 16

Cleavage and Activation of TcbA Peptide

[0306] In the toxin B complex, peptide TcbAii and TcbAiii originate from the single gene product TcbA (Example 15). The processing of TcbA peptide to TcbAii and TcbAiii is presumably by the action of Photorhabdus protease(s), and most likely, the metalloproteases described in Example 10. In some cases, it was noted that when Photorhabdus W-14 broth was processed, TcbA peptide was present in toxin B complex as a major component, in addition to peptides TcbAii and TcbAiii. Identical procedures, described for the purification of toxin B complex (Example 15), were used to enrich peptide TcbA from toxin complex fraction of W-14 broth. The final purified material was analyzed in a 4-20% gradient SDS-PAGE and major peptides were quantified by densitometry. It was determined that TcbA, TcbAii and TcbAiii comprised 58%, 36%, and 6%, respectively, of total protein. The identities of these peptides were confirmed by their respective molecular sizes in SDS-PAGE and Western blot analysis using monospecific antibodies. The native molecular weight of this fraction was determined to be 860 kDa.

[0307] The cleavage of TcbA was evaluated by treating the above purified material with purified 38 kDa and 58 kDa W-14 Photorhabdus metalloproteases (Example 10), and trypsin as a control enzyme (Sigma, Mo.). The standard reaction consisted 17.5 μg the above purified fraction, 1.5 unit protease, and 0.1 M Tris buffer, pH 8.0 in a total volume of 100 μl. For the control reaction, protease was omitted. The reaction mixtures were incubated at 37° C. for 90 min. At the end of the reaction, 20 μl was taken and boiled with SDS-PAGE sample buffer immediately for electrophoresis analysis in a 4-20% gradient SDS-PAGE. It was determined from SDS-PAGE that in both 38 kDa and 58 kDa protease treatments, the amount of peptides TcbAii and TcbAiii increased about 3-fold while the amount of TcbA peptide decreased proportionally (Table 24). The relative reduction and augmentation of selected peptides was confirmed by Western blot analyses. Furthermore, gel filtration of the cleaved material revealed that the native molecular size of the complex remained the same. Upon trypsin treatment, peptides TcbA and TcbAii were nonspecifically digested into small peptides. This indicated that 38 kDa and 58 kDa Photorhabdus proteases can specifically process peptide TcbA into peptides TcbAii and TcbAiii. Protease treated and untreated control of the remaining 80 μl reaction mixture were serial diluted with 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 and analyzed by SCR bioassay. By comparing activity in several dilution, it was determined that the 38 kDa protease treatment increased SCR insecticidal activity approximately 3 to 4 fold. The growth inhibition of remaining insects in the protease treatment was also more severe than control (Table 24).

TABLE 24
Conversion and Activation of Peptide TcbA into Peptides TcbAii and
TcbAiii by Protease Treatment
	Control	38 kDa protease treatment
TcbA (% of total protein)	58	18
TcbAii (% of total protein)	36	64
TcbAiii (% of total protein)	6	18
LD50 (μg protein)	2.1	0.52
SCR Weight (mg/insect)*	0.2	0.1
*an indication of growth inhibition by measuring the average weight of live insect after 5 days on diet in the assay.

[0308] Activation and Procession of Toxin B by SCR Gut Proteases

[0309] In yet a second demonstration of proteolytic activation, it was examined whether W-14 toxins are processed by insects. Toxin B purified from Photorhabdus W-14 broth (see Example 15) was comprised of predominantly intact TcbA peptides as judged by SDS-PAGE and Western blot analysis using monoclonal antibody. The LD50 of this fraction against SCR was determined to be around 700 ng.

[0310] SCR larva were grown on coleopteran diet until they reached the fourth instar stage (about 100-125 mg total weight each insect). SCR gut content was collected as follows: the guts were removed using dissecting scissors and forceps. After removing the excess fatty material that coats the gut lining, about 40 guts were homogenized in a microcentrifuge tube containing 100 μl sterile water. The tube was then centrifuged at 14,000 rpm for 10 minutes and the pellet discarded. The supernatant was stored at a −70° C. freezer until use.

[0311] The processing of toxin B by insect gut was evaluated by treating the above purified toxin B with the SCR gut content collected. The reaction consisted 40 μg toxin B (1 mg/ml), 50 μl SCR gut content, and 0.1M Tris buffer, pH 8.0 in a total volume of 100 μl. For the control reaction, SCR gut content was omitted. The reaction mixtures were incubated at 37° C. for overnight. At the end of reaction, 10 μl was withdraw and boiled with equal volume 2×SDS-PAGE sample buffer for SDS-PAGE analysis. The remaining 90 μl reaction mixture was serial diluted with 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 and analyzed by SCR bioassay. SDS-PAGE analysis indicated in SCR gut content treatment, peptide TcbA was digested completely into smaller peptides. Analysis of the undenatured toxin fraction showed that the native size, about 860 kDa, remained the same even though larger peptides were fragmented. In SCR bioassays, it was found that the LD50 of SCR gut treated toxin B to be about 70 ng; representing a 10-fold increase. In a separate experiment, protease K treatment completely eliminated toxin activity.

EXAMPLE 17

Screening of the Library for a Gene Encoding the TcdAii Peptide

[0312] The cloning and characterization of a gene encoding the TcdAii peptide, described as SEQ ID NO:17 (internal peptide TcdAii-PT111 N-terminal sequence) and SEQ ID NO:18 (internal peptide TcdAii-PT79 N-terminal sequence) was completed. Two pools of degenerate oligonucleotides, designed to encode the amino acid sequences of SEQ ID NO:17 (Table 25) and SEQ ID NO:18 (Table 26), and the reverse complements of those sequences, were synthesized as described in Example 8. The DNA sequence of the oligonucleotides is given below:

TABLE 21
Degenerate Oligonucleotide for SEQ ID NO:17
P2-PT111	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8
Amino Acid	Ala	Phe	Asn	Ile	Asp	Asp	Val	Ser
Codons	5′ GCN	TT(T/C)	AA(T/C)	AT(T/C/A)	GA(T/C)	GA(T/C)	GTN 3′
P2.3.6.CB	5′ GC(A/C/G/T)	TT(T/C)	AAT	ATT	GAT	GAT	GT 3′
P2.3.5	5′ GC(A/C/G/T)	TT(T/C)	AA(T/C)	AT(T/C/A)	GA(T/C)	GA(T/C)	CT 3′
P2.3.5R	5′ AC	(G/A)TC	(G/A)TC	(T/G/A)AT	T(G/A)TT	(G/A)AA	(A/C/G/T)GC 3′
P2.3.5RI	5′ ACI	TCI	TCI	ATI	TTI	AAI	GC 3′
P2.3R.CB	5′ CAG	(A/G)CT	(A/C)AC	ATC	ATC	AAT	ATT	AAA 3′

[0313]

TABLE 26

Degenerate Oligonucleotide for SEQ ID NO:18

P2-PT79

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Amino Acid

Phe

Ile

Val

Tyr

Thr

Ser

Leu

Gly

Val Asn

Pro Asn

Asn

Codons*

5′TTY

ATH

GTN

TAY

ACH

6

6

GGN

GTN

AAY

CCN AAY

AAY 3′

P2.79.2

5′TTY

ATY

GTK

TAT

ACY

TCI

YTR

GGY

GTK

AAT

CCR

AAT

AAT 3′

P2.79.3

5′TTT

ATT

GTK

TAT

ACY

AGY

YTR

GGY

GTK

AAT

CCR

AAT

AAT 3′

P2.79.R.1

5′ATT

ATT

YGG

ATT

MAC

RCC

YAR

RCT

RGT

ATA

MAC

AAT

AAA 3′

P2.79R.CB

5′ATT

ATT

YGG

ATT

MAC

ACC

CAG

RCT

GGT

ATA

MAC

AAT

AAA 3′

* According to IUPAC-TUB codes for nucleotides, Y = C or T, H = A, C or T, N = A, C, G or T, K = G or T, R = A or G, and M = A or C

[0314] Polymerase Chain Reactions (PCR) were performed essentially as described in Example 8, using as forward primers P2.3.6.CB or P2.3.5, and as reverse primers P2.79.R.1 or P2.79R.CB, in all forward/reverse combinations, using Photorhabdus W-14 genomic DNA as template. In another set of reactions, primers P2.79.2 or P2.79.3 were used as forward primers, and P2.3.5R, P2.3.5RI, and P2.3R.CB were used as reverse primers in all forward/reverse combinations. Only in the reactions containing P2.3.6.CB as the forward primers combined with P2.79.R.1 or P2.79R.CB as the reverse primers was a non-artifactual amplified product seen, of estimated size (mobility on agarose gels) of 2500 base pairs. The order of the primers used to obtain this amplification product indicates that the peptide fragment TcdAii-PT111 lies amino-proximal to the peptide fragment TcdAii-PT79.

[0315] The 2500 bp PCR products were ligated to the plasmid vector pCR™II (Invitrogen, San Diego, Calif.) according to the supplier's instructions, and the DNA sequences across the ends of the insert fragments of two isolates (HS24 and HS27) were determined using the supplier's recommended primers and the sequencing methods described previously. The sequence of both isolates was the same. New primers were synthesized based on the determined sequence, and used to prime additional sequencing reactions to obtain a total of 2557 bases of the insert [SEQ ID NO:36]. Translation of the partial peptide encoded by SEQ ID No: 36 yields the 845 amino acid sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO:37. Protein homology analysis of this portion of the TcdAii peptide fragment reveals substantial amino acid homology ((68% similarity, and 53% identity using the Wisconsin Package Version 8.0, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), Madison, Wis.) to residues 542 to 1390 of protein TcbA [SEQ ID NO:12] or (60% similarity, and 54% identity using the Wisconsin Package Version 9.0, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), Madison, Wis. to residues 567 to 1389)). It is therefore apparent that the gene represented in part by SEQ ID NO:36 produces a protein of similar, but not identical, amino acid sequence as the TcbA protein, and which likely has similar, but not identical biological activity as the TcbA protein.

[0316] In yet another instance, a gene encoding the peptides TcdAii-PK44 and the TcdAiii 58 kDa N-terminal peptide, described as SEQ ID NO:39 (internal peptide TcdAii-PK44 sequence), and SEQ ID NO:41 (TcdAiii 58 kDa N-terminal peptide sequence) was isolated. Two pools of degenerate oligonucleotides, designed to encode the amino acid sequences described as SEQ ID NO:39 (Table 28) and SEQ ID NO:41 (Table 27), and the reverse complements of those sequences, were synthesized as described in Example 8, and their DNA sequences.

TABLE 27

Degenerate Oligonucleotide for SEQ ID NO:41

Codon #

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Amino Acid

Lei

Arg

Ser

Ala

Asn

Thr

Leu

Thr

Asp

Leu

Phe

Leu

Pro

Gln

A2.1

5′YIR

CGY

AGY

CGI

AAT

ACY

YIR

ACY

GAT

YIR

TTT

YIR

CCR

CA 3′

A2.2

CGI

AAT

ACI

YIR

ACI

GAY

YIR

TTY

YIR

CCI

CA 3′

A2.3.R

5′TG

YGG

YAR

AAA

YAR

RTC

RGT

YAR

RGT

RIT

IGC

RCT

RCG 3′

A2.4.R

5′TG

IGG

CAG

AAA

CAG

RTC

IGT

CAG

IGT

ATT

IGC 3′

[0317]

TABLE 28
Degenerate Oligonucleotide for SEQ ID NO:39
Amino Acid #	(8)	(9)	(10)	(11)	(12)	(13)	(14)	(15)	(16)
Codon #	1	2	3 4	5	6	7	8	9
Amino Acid	Gly	Pro	Val	Glu	Ile	Asn	Thr	Ala	Ile
A1.44.1	5′GGY	CCR	GTK	GAA	ATT	AAT	ACC	GCI	AT 3′
A1.44.1R	5′ATI	GCG	GTA	TTA	ATT	TCM	ACY	GGR	CC 3′
A1.44.2	5′CCI	CCI	CTI	CAR	ATY	AAY	ACI	GCI	AT 3′
A1.44.2R	5′ATI	GCI	GTR	TTR	ATY	TCI	ACT	GGI	CC 3′

[0318] Polymerase Chain Reactions (PCR) were performed essentially as described in Example 8, using as forward primers A1.44.1 or A1.44.2, and reverse primers A2.3R or A2.4R, in all forward/reverse combinations, using Photorhabdus W-14 genomic DNA as template. In another set of reactions, primers A2.1 or A2.2 were used as forward primers, and A1.44.1R, and A1.44.2R were used as reverse primers in all forward/reverse combinations. Only in the reactions containing A1.44.1 or A1.44.2 as the forward primers combined with A2.3R as the reverse primer was a non-artifactual amplified product seen, of estimated size (mobility on agarose gels) of 1400 base pairs. The order of the primers used to obtain this amplification product indicates that the peptide fragment TcdAii-PK44 lies amino-proximal to the 58 kDa peptide fragment of TcdAiii.

[0319] The 1400 bp PCR products were ligated to the plasmid vector pCR™II according to the supplier's instructions. The DNA sequences across the ends of the insert fragments of four isolates were determined using primers similar in sequence to the supplier's recommended primers and using sequencing methods described previously. The nucleic acid sequence of all isolates differed as expected in the regions corresponding to the degenerate primer sequences, but the amino acid sequences deduced from these data were the same as the actual amino acid sequences for the peptides determined previously, (SEQ ID NOS:41 and 39).

[0320] Screening of the W-14 genomic cosmid library as described in Example 8 with a radiolabeled probe comprised of the DNA prepared above (SEQ ID NO:36) identified five hybridizing cosmid isolates, namely 17D9, 20B10, 21D2, 27B10, and 26D1. These cosmids were distinct from those previously identified with probes corresponding to the genes described as SEQ ID NO:11 or SEQ ID NO:25. Restriction enzyme analysis and DNA blot hybridizations identified three EcoR I fragments, of approximate sizes 3.7, 3.7, and 1.1 kbp, that span the region comprising the DNA of SEQ ID NO:36. Screening of the W-14 genomic cosmid library using as probe the radiolabeled 1.4 kbp DNA fragment prepared in this example identified the same five cosmids (17D9, 20B10, 21D2, 27B10, and 26D1). DNA blot hybridization to EcoR I-digested cosmid DNAs also showed hybridization to the same subset of EcoR I fragments as seen with the 2.5 kbp TcdAii gene probe, indicating that both fragments are encoded on the genomic DNA.

[0321] DNA sequence determination of the cloned EcoR I fragments revealed an uninterrupted reading frame of 7551 base pairs (SEQ ID NO:46), encoding a 282.9 kDa protein of 2516 amino acids (SEQ ID NO:47). Analysis of the amino acid sequence of this protein revealed all expected internal fragments of peptides TcdAii (SEQ ID NOS:17, 18, 37, 38 and 39) and the TcdAiii peptide N-terminus (SEQ ID NO:41) and all TcdAiii internal peptides (SEQ ID NOS:42 and 43). The peptides isolated and identified as TcdAii and TcdAiii are each products of the open reading frame, denoted tcdA, disclosed as SEQ ID NO:46. Further, SEQ ID NO:47 shows, starting at position 89, the sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO:13, which is the N-terminal sequence of a peptide of size approximately 201 kDa, indicating that the initial protein produced from SEQ ID NO: 46 is processed in a manner similar to that previously disclosed for SEQ ID NO:12. In addition, the protein is further cleaved to generate a product of size 209.2 kDa, encoded by SEQ ID NO:48 and disclosed as SEQ ID NO:49 (TcdAii peptide), and a product of size 63.6 kDa, encoded by SEQ ID NO:50 and disclosed as SEQ ID NO:51 (TcdAiii peptide). Thus, it is thought that the insecticidal activity identified as toxin A (Example 15) derived from the products of SEQ ID NO:46, as exemplified by the full-length protein of 282.9 kDa disclosed as SEQ ID NO:47, is processed to produce the peptides disclosed as SEQ ID NOS:49 and 51. It is thought that the insecticidal activity identified as toxin B (Example 15) derives from the products of SEQ ID NO:11, as exemplified by the 280.6 kDa protein disclosed as SEQ ID NO:12. This protein is proteolytically processed to yield the 207.6 kDa peptide disclosed as SEQ ID NO:53, which is encoded by SEQ ID NO:52, and the 62.9 kDa peptide having N-terminal sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO:40, and further disclosed as SEQ ID NO:55, which is encoded by SEQ ID NO:54.

[0322] Amino acid sequence comparisons between the proteins disclosed as SEQ ID NO:12 and SEQ ID NO:47 reveal that they have 69% similarity and 54% identity using the Wisconsin Package Version 8.0, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), Madison, Wis. or 60% similarity and 54% identity using version 9.0 of the program. This high degree of evolutionary relationship is not uniform throughout the entire amino acid sequence of these peptides, but is higher towards the carboxy-terminal end of the proteins, since the peptides disclosed as SEQ ID NO:51 (derived from SEQ ID NO:47) and SEQ ID NO:55 (derived from SEQ ID NO:12) have 76% similarity and 64% identity using the Wisconsin Package Version 8.0, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), Madison, Wis. or 71% similarity and 64% identity using version 9.0 of the program.

EXAMPLE 18

Control of European Cornborer-Induced Leaf Damage on Maize Plants by Spray Application of Photorhabdus (Strain W-14) Broth

[0323] The ability of Photorhabdus toxin(s) to reduce plant damage caused by insect larvae was demonstrated by measuring leaf damage caused by European corn borer (Ostrinia nubilalis) infested onto maize plants treated with Photorhabdus broth. Fermentation broth from Photorhabdus strain W-14 was produced and concentrated approximately 10-fold using ultrafiltration (10,000 MW pore-size) as described in Example 13. The resulting concentrated broth was then filter sterilized using 0.2 micron nitrocellulose membrane filters. A similarly prepared sample of uninoculated 2% proteose peptone #3 was used for control purposes. Maize plants (an inbred line) were grown from seed to vegetative stage 7 or 8 in pots containing a soilless mixture in a greenhouse (27° C. day; 22° C. night, about 50% RH, 14 hr day-length, watered/fertilized as needed). The test plants were arranged in a randomized complete block design (3 reps/treatment, 6 plants/treatment) in a greenhouse with temperature about 22° C. day; 18° C. night, no artificial light and with partial shading, about 50% RH and watered/fertilized as needed. Treatments (uninoculated media and concentrated Photorhabdus broth) were applied with a syringe sprayer, 2.0 mls applied from directly (about 6 inches) over the whorl and 2.0 additional mls applied in a circular motion from approximately one foot above the whorl. In addition, one group of plants received no treatment. After the treatments had dried (approximately 30 minutes), twelve neonate European corn borer larvae (eggs obtained from commercial sources and hatched in-house) were applied directly to the whorl. After one week, the plants were scored for damage to the leaves using a modified Guthrie Scale (Koziel, M. G., Beland, G. L., Bowman, C., Carozzi, N. B., Crenshaw, R., Crossland, L., Dawson, J., Desai, N., Hill, M., Kadwell, S., Launis, K., Lewis, K., Maddox, D., McPherson, K., Meghji, M. Z., Merlin, E., Rhodes, R., Warren, G. W., Wright, M. and Evola, S. V. 1993).

[0324] Bio/Technology, 11, 194-195.) and the scores were compared statistically [T-test (LSD) p<0.05 and Tukey's Studentized Range (HSD) Test p<0.1]. The results are shown in Table 29. For reference, a score of 1 represents no damage, a score of 2 represents fine “window pane” damage on the unfurled leaf with no pinhole penetration and a score of 5 represents leaf penetration with elongated lesions and/or mid rib feeding evident on more than three leaves (lesions <1 inch). These data indicate that broth or other protein containing fractions may confer protection against specific insect pests when delivered in a sprayable formulation or when the gene or derivative thereof, encoding the protein or part thereof, is delivered via a transgenic plant or microbe.

TABLE 29
Effect of Photorhabdus Culture Broth on
European Corn Borer-Induced Leaf Damage on Maize
Treatment           Average Guthrie Score
No Treatment        5.02a
Uninoculated medium 5.15a
Photorhabdus Broth  2.24b
Means with different letters are statistically different (p < 0.05 or p < 0.1).

EXAMPLE 19

Genetic Engineering of Genes for Expression in E. coli

[0325] Summary of Constructions

[0326] A series of plasmids were constructed to express the tcbA gene of Photorhabdus W-14 in Escherichia coli. A list of the plasmids is shown in Table 30. A brief description of each construction follows as well as a summary of the E. coli expression data obtained.

TABLE 30
Expression Plasmids for the tcbA Gene
	Plasmid	Gene	Vector/Selection	Compartment
	pDAB2025	tcbA	pBC/Chl	Intracellular
	pDAB2026	tcbA	pAcGP67B/Amp	Baculovirus,
				secreted
	pDAB2027	tcbA	pET27b/Kan	Periplasm
	pDAB2028	tcbA	pET15-tcbA	Intracellular
	Abbreviations:
	Kan = kanamycin,
	Chl = chloramphenicol,
	Amp = ampicillin

[0327] Construction of pDAB2025

[0328] In Example 9, a large EcoR I fragment which hybridizes to the TcbAii probe is described. This fragment was subcloned into pBC (Stratagene, La Jolla Calif.) to create pDAB2025. Sequence analysis indicates that the fragment is 8816 base pairs. The fragment encodes the tcbA gene with the initiating ATG at position 571 and the terminating TAA at position 8086. The fragment therefore carries 570 base pairs of Photorhabdus DNA upstream of the ATG and 730 base pairs downstream of the TAA.

[0329] Construction of Plasmid pDAB2026

[0330] The tcbA gene was PCR amplified from plasmid pDAB2025 using the following primers; 5′ primer (SlAc51) 5′ TTT AAA CCA TGG GAA ACT CAT TAT CAA GCA CTA TC 3′ and 3′ primer (SlAc31) 5′ TTT AAA GCG GCC GCT TAA CGG ATG GTA TAA CGA ATA TG 3′. PCR was performed using a TaKaRa LA PCR kit from PanVera (Madison, Wis.) in the following reaction: 57.5 microliters water, 10 microliters 10×LA buffer, 16 microliters dNTPs (2.5 mM each stock solution), 20 microliters each primer at 10 pmoles/ microliters, 300 ng of the plasmid pDAB2025 containing the W-14 tcbA gene and one microliter of TaKaRa LA Taq polymerase. The cycling conditions were 98° C./20 sec, 68° C./5 min, 72° C./10 min for 30 cycles. A PCR product of the expected about 7526 bp was isolated in a 0.8% agarose gel in TBE (100 mM Tris, 90 mM boric acid, 1 mM EDTA) buffer and purified using a Qiaex II kit from Qiagen (Chatsworth, Calif.). The purified tcbA gene was digested with Nco I and Not I and ligated into the baculovirus transfer vector pAcGP67B (PharMingen (San Diego, Calif.)) and transformed into DH5α E. coli. The resulting recombinant is called pDAB2026. The tcbA gene was then cut from pDAB2026 and transferred to pET27b to create plasmid pDAB2027. A missense mutation in the tcbA gene was repaired in pDAB2027.

[0331] The repaired tcbA gene contains two changes from the sequence shown in Sequence ID NO:11; an A>G at 212 changing an asparagine 71 to serine 71 and a G>A at 229 changing an alanine 77 to threonine 77. These changes are both upstream of the proposed TcbAii N-terminus.

[0332] Construction of pDAB2028

[0333] The tcbA coding region of pDAB2027 was transferred to vector pET15b. This was accomplished using shotgun ligations, the DNAs were cut with restriction enzymes Nco I and Xho I. The resulting recombinant is called pDAB2028.

[0334] Expression of TcbA in E. coli from Plasmid pDAB2028

[0335] Expression of tcbA in E. coli was obtained by modification of the methods previously described by Studier et al. (Studier, F. W., Rosenberg, A., Dunn, J., and Dubendorff, J., (1990) Use of T7 RNA polymerase to direct expression of cloned genes. Methods Enzymol., 185: 60-89.). Competent E. coli cells strain BL21(DE3) were transformed with plasmid pDAB2028 and plated on LB agar containing 100 μg/mL ampicillin and 40 mM glucose. The transformed cells were plated to a density of several hundred isolated colonies/plate. Following overnight incubation at 37° C. the cells were scraped from the plates and suspended in LB broth containing 100 μg/mL ampicillin. Typical culture volumes were from 200-500 mL. At time zero, culture densities (OD600) were from 0.05-0.15 depending on the experiment. Cultures were shaken at one of three temperatures (22° C., 30° C. or 37° C.) until a density of 0.15-0.5 was obtained at which time they were induced with 1 mM isopropylthio-β-galactoside (IPTG). Cultures were incubated at the designated temperature for 4-5 hours and then were transferred to 4° C. until processing (12-72 hours).

[0336] Purification and Characterization of TcbA Expressed in E. coli from Plasmid pDAB2028

[0337] E. coli cultures expressing TcbA peptides were processed as follows. Cells were harvested by centrifugation at 17,000×G and the media was decanted and saved in a separate container.

[0338] The media was concentrated about 8× using the M12 (Amicon, Beverly Mass.) filtration system and a 100 kD molecular mass cut-off filter. The concentrated media was loaded onto an anion exchange column and the bound proteins were eluted with 1.0 M NaCl. The 1.0 M NaCl elution peak was found to cause mortality against Southern corn rootworm (SCR) larvae Table 30). The 1.0 M NaCl fraction was dialyzed against 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer pH 7.0, concentrated, and subjected to gel filtration on Sepharose CL-4B (Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.). The region of the CL-4B elution profile corresponding to calculated molecular weight (about 900 kDa) as the native W-14 toxin complex was collected, concentrated and bioassayed against larvae. The collected 900 kDa fraction was found to have insecticidal activity (see Table 31 below), with symptomology similar to that caused by native W-14 toxin complex. This fraction was subjected to Proteinase K and heat treatment, the activity in both cases was either eliminated or reduced, providing evidence that the activity is proteinaceous in nature. In addition, the active fraction tested immunologically positive for the TcbA and TcbAiii peptides in immunoblot analysis when tested with an anti-TcbAiii monoclonal antibody (Table 31).

TABLE 31
Results of Immunoblot and SCR Bioassays
			Native
			Size
	SCR Activity	Immunoblot	[CL-4B
	%	% Growth	Peptides	Estimated
Fraction	Mortality	Inhibit.	Detected	Size]
TcbA Media 1.0 M	+++	+++	TcbA
Ion Exchange
TcbA Media CL-4B	+++	+++	TcbA,	about
			TcbAiii	900 kDa
TcbA Media CL-4B +	++	+++	NT
Proteinase K
TcbA Media CL-4B +	−	−	NT
heat treatment
TcbA Cell Sup CL-4B	−	+++	NT	about
				900 kD
PK = Proteinase K treatment 2 hours;
Heat treatment = 100° C. for 10 minutes;
ND = None Detected;
NT = Not Tested.
Scoring system for mortality and growth inhibition as compared to control samples;
5-24% = “+”,
25-49% = “++”,
50-100% = “+++”.

[0339] The cell pellet was resuspended in 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH=7.0, and lysed by passage through a Bio-Neb™ cell nebulizer (Glas-Col Inc., Terra Haute, Ind.). The pellets were treated with DNase to remove DNA and centrifuged at 17,000×g to separate the cell pellet from the cell supernatant. The supernatant fraction was decanted and filtered through a 0.2 micron filter to remove large particles and subjected to anion exchange chromatography. Bound proteins were eluted with 1.0 M NaCl, dialyzed and concentrated using Biomax™ (Millipore Corp, Bedford, Mass.) concentrators with a molecular mass cut-off of 50,000 Daltons. The concentrated fraction was subjected to gel filtration chromatography using Sepharose CL-4B beaded matrix. Bioassay data for material prepared in this way is shown in Table 30 and is denoted as “TcbA Cell Sup”.

[0340] In yet another method to handle large amounts of material, the cell pellets were re-suspended in 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH=7.0 and thoroughly homogenized by using a Kontes Glass Company (Vineland, N.J.) 40 ml tissue grinder. The cellular debris was pelleted by centrifugation at 25,000×g and the cell supernatant was decanted, passed through a 0.2 micron filter and subjected to anion exchange chromatography using a Pharmacia 10/10 column packed with Poros HQ 50 beads. The bound proteins were eluted by performing a NaCl gradient of 0.0 to 1.0 M. Fractions containing the TcbA protein were combined and concentrated using a 50 kDa concentrator and subjected to gel filtration chromatography using Pharmacia CL-4B beaded matrix. The fractions containing TcbA oligomer, molecular mass of approximately 900 kDa, were collected and subjected to anion exchange chromatography using a Pharmacia Mono Q 10/10 column equilibrated with 20 mM Tris buffer pH=7.3. A gradient of 0.0 to 1.0 M NaCl was used to elute recombinant TcbA protein. Recombinant TcbA eluted from the column at a salt concentration of approximately 0.3-0.4 M NaCl, the same molarity at which native TcbA oligomer is eluted from the Mono Q 10/10 column. The recombinant TcbA fraction was found to cause SCR mortality in bioassay experiments similar to those in Table 31.

[0341] A second set of expression constructions were prepared and tested for expression of the TcbA protein toxin.

[0342] Construction of pDAB2030: An Expression Plasmid for the tcbA Coding Region

[0343] The plasmid pDAB2028 (see herein) contains the tcbA coding region in the commercial vector pET15 (Novagen, Madison, Wis.), encodes an ampicillin selection marker. The plasmid pDAB2030 was created to express the tcbA coding region from a plasmid which encodes a kanamycin selection marker. This was done by cutting pET27 (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) a kanamycin selection plasmid, and pDAB2028 with Xba I and Xho I. This releases the entire multiple cloning site, including the tcbA coding region from plasmid pDAB2028. The two cut plasmids, were mixed and ligated. Recombinant plasmids were selected on kanamycin and those containing the pDAB2028 fragment were identified by restriction analysis. The new recombinant plasmid is called pDAB2030.

[0344] Construction of Plasmid pDAB2031: Correction of Mutations in tcbAi

[0345] The two mutations in the N-terminus of the tcbA coding region as described in Example 19 (Sequence ID NO:11; A>G at 212 changing an asparagine 71 to serine 71; G>A at 229 changing an alanine 77 to threonine 77) were corrected as follows: A PCR product was generated using the primers TH50 (5′ ACC GTC TTC TTT ACG ATC AGT G 3′) and SlAc51(5′ TTT AAA CCA TGG GAA ACT CAT TAT CAA GCA CTA TC 3′)and pDAB2025 as template to generate a 1778 bp product. This PCR product was cloned into plasmid pCR2.1 (Invitrogen, San Diego, Calif.) and a clone was isolated and sequenced. The clone was digested with Nco I and Pin AI and a 1670 bp fragment was purified from a 1% agarose gel. A plasmid containing the mutated tcbA coding region (pDAB2030) was digested with Nco I and Not I and purified away from the 1670 bp fragment in a 0.8% agarose with Qiaex II (Qiagen, Chatsworth, Calif.). The corrected Nco I/Pin AI fragment was then ligated into pDAB2030. The ligated DNA was transformed into DH5α E. coli. A clone was isolated, sequenced and found to be correct. This plasmid, containing the corrected tcbA coding region, is called pDAB2031.

[0346] Construction of pDAB2033 and pDAB2034: Expression Plasmids for tcbA

[0347] The expression plasmids pDAB2025 and pDAB2027-2031 all rely on the Bacteriophage T7 expression system. An additional vector system was used for bacterial expression of the tcbA gene and its derivatives. The expression vector Trc99a (Pharmacia Biotech, Piscataway, N.J.) contains a strong trc promoter upstream of a multiple cloning site with a 5′ Nco I site which is compatible with the tcbA coding region from pDAB2030 and 2031. However, the plasmid does not have a compatible 3′ site. Therefore, the Hind III site of Trc99a was cut and made blunt by treatment with T4 DNA polymerase (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.). The vector plasmid was then cut by Nco I followed by treatment with alkaline phosphatase. The plasmids pDAB2030 and pDAB2031 were each cut with Xho I (cuts at the 3′ end of the tcbA coding region) followed by treatment with T4 DNA polymerase to blunt the ends. The plasmids were then cut with Nco I, the DNAs were extracted with phenol, ethanol precipitated and resuspended in buffer. The Trc99a and pDAB2030 and pDAB2031 plasmids were mixed separately, ligated and transformed into DH5α cells and plated on LB media containing ampicillin and 50 mM glucose. Recombinant plasmids were identified by restriction digestion. The new plasmids are called pDAB2033 (contains the tcbA coding sequence with the two mutations in tcbAi) and pDAB2034 (contains the corrected version of tcbA from pDAB2031).

[0348] Construction of Plasmid pDAB2032: An Expression Plasmid for tcbAiiAiii

[0349] A plasmid encoding the TcbAiiAiii portion of TcbA was created in a similar way as plasmid pDAB2031. A PCR product was generated using TH42 (5′ TAG GTC TCC ATG GCT TTT ATA CAA GGT TAT AGT GAT CTG 3′) and TH50 (5′ ACC GTC TTC TTT ACG ATC AGT G 3′) primers and plasmid pDAB2025 as template. This yielded a product of 1521 bp having an initiation codon at the beginning of the coding sequence of tcbAii. This PCR product was isolated in a 1% agarose gel and purified. The purified product was cloned into pCR2.1 as above and a correct clone was identified by DNA sequence analysis. This clone was digested with Nco I and Pin AI, a 1414 bp fragment was isolated in a 1% agarose gel and ligated into the Nco I and Pin AI sites of plasmid pDAB2030 and transformed into DH5α E. coli. This new plasmid, designed to express TcbAiiAiii in E. coli, is called pDAB2032.

[0350] Expression of tcbA and tcbAiiAiii from Plasmids pDAB2030, pDAB2031 and pDAB2032

[0351] Expression of tcbA in E. coli from plasmids pDAB2030, pDAB2031 and pDAB2032 was as described herein, except expression of tcbAiiAiii was done in E. coli strain HMS174(DE3) (Novagen, Madison, Wis.).

[0352] Expression of tcbA from Plasmid pDAB2033

[0353] The plasmid pDAB2033 was transformed into BL21 cells (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) and plated on LB containing 100 micrograms/mL ampicillin and 50 mM glucose. The plates were spread such that several hundred well separated colonies were present on each plate following incubation at either 30° C. or 37° C. overnight. The colonies were scraped from the plates and suspended in LB containing 100 micrograms/mL ampicillin, but no glucose. Typical culture volume was 250 mL in a single 1 L baffle bottom flask. The cultures were induced when the culture reached a density of 0.3-0.6 OD600 nm. Most often this density was achieved immediately after suspension of the cells from the plates and did not require a growth period in liquid media. Two induction methods were used. Method 1: cells were induced with 1 mM IPTG at 37° C. The cultures were shaken at 200 rpm on a platform shaker for 5 hours and harvested. Method 2: The cultures were induced with 25 micromolar IPTG at 30° C. and shaken at 200 rpm for 15 hours at either 20° C. or 30° C. The cultures were stored at 4° C. until used for purification.

[0354] Purification of TcbA from E. coli

[0355] Purification, bioassay and immunoblot analysis of TcbA and TcbAiiAiii was as described herein. Results of several representative E. coli expression experiments are shown in Table 32. All materials shown in Table 32 were purified from the media fraction of the cultures. The predicted native molecular weight is approximately 900 kD as described herein. The purity of the samples, the amount of TcbA relative to contaminating proteins, varied with each preparation.

TABLE 32
Bioassay Activity and Immunoblot Analysis of TcbA and Derivatives
Produced in E. coli and Purified from the Culture Media
		Southern Corn
		Rootworm Bioassay	Peptides	Micrograms
	E.	Activity	Detected	Protein
	Coding	coli	% Growth	%	by	Applied to
Plasmid	Region	Strain	Inhibit.	Mortal.	Immunoblot	Diet
pDAB2030	tcbA	BL21	−	+++	TcbA + TcbAiii	1-8
		(DE3)
pDAB2031	tcbA	BL21	−	+++	TcbA + TcbAiii	1-10
		(DE3)
pDAB2033	tcbA	BL21	−	+++	TcbA + TcbAiii	1-2
pDAB2032	tcbAiiAiii	HMS174	+++	+	TcbAiiAiii + TcbAiii	13-27
		(DE3)
Scoring system for mortality and growth inhibition on Southern Corn Rootworm as compared to control samples;
5-24% = “+”,
25-49% = “++”,
50-100% = “+++”.

EXAMPLE 20

Characterization of Toxin Peptides with Matrix-Assisted Laser Desorption Ionization Time-of-Flight Mass Spectroscopy

[0356] Toxins isolated from W-14 broth were purified as described in Example 15. In some cases, the TcaB protein toxin was pretreated with proteases (Example 16) that had been isolated from W-14 broth as previously described (Example 15). Protein molecular mass was determined using matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization time-of-flight mass spectroscopy, hereinafter MALDI-TOF, on a VOYAGER BIOSPECTROMETRY workstation with DELAYED EXTRACTION technology (PerSeptive Biosystems, Framingham, MASS.). Typically, the protein of interest (100-500 pmoles in 5 μl) was mixed with 1 μl of acetonitrile and dialyzed for 0.5 to 1 h on a Millipore VS filter having a pore size of 0.025 μM (Millipore Corp. Bedford, Mass.) Dialysis was performed by floating the filter on water(shinny side up) followed by adding protein-acetonitrile mixture as a droplet to the surface of the filter. After dialysis, the dialyzed protein removed using a pipette and was then mixed with a matrix consisting of sinapinic acid and trifluoroacetic acid according to manufacturers instructions. The protein and matrix were allowed to co-crystallize on a about 3 cm2 gold-plated sample plate (PerSeptive Corp.). Excitation of the crystals and subsequent mass analysis was performed using the following conditions: laser setting of 3050; pressure of 4.55e-07; low mass gate of 1500.0; negative ions off; accelerating voltage of 25,000; grid voltage of 90.0%; guide wire voltage of 0.010%; linear mode; and a pulse delay time of 350 ns.

[0357] Protein mass analysis data are shown in Table 33. The data obtained from MALDI-TOF was compared to that hypothesized from gene sequence information and as previously determined by SDS-PAGE.

TABLE 33
Molecular Analysis of Peptides by MALDI-TOF, SDS-PAGE
and Predicted Determination Based on Gene Sequence
	Peptide	Predicted (Gene)	SDS PAGE	MALDI-TOF
	TcbA	280,634 Da	240,000 Da	281,040 Da
	TcbAi/ii	217,710 Da	not resolved	216,812 Da
	TcbAii	207,698 Da	201,000 Da	206,473 Da
	TcbAiii	62,943 Da	58,000 Da	63,520 Da
	TcdAii	209,218 Da	188,000 Da	208,186 Da
	TcdAiii	63,520 Da	56,000 Da	63,544 Da
	TcbAii	Protease Generated	201,000 Da	216,614 Da{circumflex over ( )}
				215,123 Da{circumflex over ( )}
				210,391 Da{circumflex over ( )}
				208,680 Da{circumflex over ( )}
	TcbAiii	Protease Generated	56,000 Da	64,111 Da
	{circumflex over ( )}Data normalized TcbA, multiple fragments observed at TcbAi/ii

EXAMPLE 21

Production of Peptide Specific Polyclonal Antibodies

[0358] Nine peptide components of the W-14 toxin complex, namely, TcaA, TcaAiii, TcaBi, TcaBii, TcaC, TcbAii, TcbAiii, TcdAii, and TcdAiii were selected as targets against which antibodies were produced. Comprehensive DNA and deduced amino acid sequence data for these peptides indicated that the sequence homology between some of these peptides was substantial. If a whole peptide was used as the immunogen to induce antibody production, the resulting antibodies might bind to multiple peptides in the toxin preparation. To avoid this problem antibodies were generated that would bind specifically to a unique region of each peptide of interest. The unique region (subpeptide) of each target peptide was selected based on the analyses described below.

[0359] Each entire peptide sequence was analyzed using MacVector™ Protein Analysis Tool (IBI Sequence Analysis Software, International Biotechnologies, Inc., P. O. Box 9558, New Haven, Conn. 06535) to determine its antigenicity index. This program was designed to locate possible externally-located amino acid sequences, i.e., regions that might be antigenic sites. This method combined information from hydrophilicity, surface probability, and backbone flexibility predictions along with the secondary structure predictions in order to produce a composite prediction of the surface contour of a protein. The scores for each of the analyses were normalized to a value between −1.0 and +1.0 (MacVector™ Manual). The antigenicity index value was obtained for the entire sequence of the target peptide. From each peptide, an area covering 19 or more amino acids that showed a high antigenicity index from the original sequence was re-analyzed to determine the antigenicity index of the subpeptide without the flanking residues. This re-analysis was necessary because the antigenicity index of a peptide could be influenced by the flanking amino acid residues. If the isolated subpeptide sequence did not maintain a high antigenicity index, a new region was chosen and the analysis was repeated.

[0360] Each selected subpeptide sequence was aligned and compared to all seven target peptide sequences using MacVector™ alignment program. If a selected subpeptide sequence showed identity (greater than 20%) to another target peptide, a new 19 or more amino acid region was isolated and re-analyzed. Unique subpeptide sequences covering 19 or more amino acid showing high antigenicity index were selected from all target peptides.

[0361] The sequences of seven subpeptides were sent to Genemed Biotechnology Inc. The last amino acid residue on each subpeptide was deleted because it showed no apparent effect on the antigenicity index. A cysteine residue was added to the N-terminal of each subpeptide sequence, except TcaBi-syn which contains an internal cysteine residue. The present of a cysteine residue facilitates conjugation of a carrier protein (KLH). The final peptide products corresponding to the appropriate toxin peptides and SEQ ID NO.s are shown in Table 34.

TABLE 34
Amino Acid Sequences for Synthetic Peptides
SEQ ID No.	Pepide	Amino Acid Sequence
63	TcaAii-syn	NH2-(C) L R G N S P T N P D K D G I F A Q V A
64	TcaAiii-syn	NH2-(C) Y T P D Q T P S F Y E T A F R S A D G
65	TcaBi-syn	NH2-H G Q S Y N D N N Y C N F T L S I N T
66	TcaBiii-syn	NH2-(C) V D P K T L Q R Q Q A G G D G T G S S
67	TcaC-syn	NH2-(C) Y K A P Q R Q E D G D S N A V T Y D K
68	TcbAii-syn	NH2-(C) Y N E N P S S E D K K W Y F S S K D D
69	TcbAiii-syn	NH2-(C) F D S Y S Q L Y E E N I N A G E Q R A
70	TcdAii-syn	NH2-(C) N P N N S S N K L M F Y P V Y Q Y S G N T
71	TcdAiii-syn	NH2-(C) V S Q G S G S A G S G N N N L A F G A G

[0362] Each conjugated synthetic peptide was injected into two rabbits according to Genemed accelerated program. The pre- and post-immune sera were available for testing after one month.

[0363] The preliminary test of both pre- and post-immune sera from each rabbit was performed by Genemed Biotechnologies Inc. Genemed reported that by using both ELISA and Western blot techniques, they detected the reaction of post-immune sera to the respective synthetic peptides. Subsequently, the sera were tested with the whole target peptides, by Western blot analysis. Two batches of partially purified Photorhabdus strain W-14 toxin complex was used as the antigen. The two samples had shown activity against the Southern corn rootworm. Their peptide patterns on an SDS-PAGE gel were slightly different.

[0364] Pre-cast SDS-polyacrylamide gels with 4-20% gradient (Integrated Separation Systems, Natick, Mass. 01760) were used. Between 1 to 8 μg of protein was applied to each gel well. Electrophoresis was performed and the protein was electroblotted onto Hybond-ECL™ nitrocellulose membrane (Amersham International). The membrane was blocked with 10% milk in TBST (25 mM Tris HCl pH 7.4, 136 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM KCl, 0.1% Tween 20) for one hour at room temperature. Each rabbit serum was diluted in 10% milk/TBST to 1:500. Other dilutions between 1:50 to 1:1000 were also used. The serum was added to the membrane and placed on a platform rocker for at least one hour. The membrane was washed thoroughly with the blocking solution or TBST. A 1:2000 dilution of secondary antibodies (goat anti-mouse IgG conjugated to horse radish peroxidase; BioRad Laboratories) in 10% milk/TBST was applied to the membrane placed on a platform rocker for one hour. The membrane was subsequently washed with excess amount of TBST. The detection of the protein was performed by using an ECL (Enhanced Chemiluminescence) detection kit (Amersham International).

[0365] Western blot analyses were performed to identify binding specificity of each anti-synthetic peptide antibodies. All synthetic polyclonal antibodies showed specificity toward to processed and, when applicable, unprocessed target peptides from protein fractions derived from Photorhabdus culture broth. Various antibodies were shown to recognize either unprocessed or processed recombinant proteins derived from heterologous expression systems such as bacteria or insect cells, using baculovirus expression constructs. In one case, the anti-TcbAiii-syn antibody showed some cross-reactivity to anti-TcdAiii peptide. In a second case, the anti-TcaC-syn antibody, recognized an unidentified 190 kDa peptide in W-14 toxin complex fractions.

EXAMPLE 22

Characterization of Photorhabdus Strains

[0366] In order to establish that the collection described herein was comprised of Photorhabdus strains, the strains herein were assessed in terms of recognized microbiological traits that are characteristic of the bacterial genus Photorhabdus and which differentiate it from other Enterobacteriaceae and Xenorhabdus spp. (Farmer, J. J. 1984. Bergey's Manual of Systemic Bacteriology, Vol 1. pp. 510-511. (ed. Kreig N. R. and Holt, J. G.). Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.; Akhurst and Boemare, 1988, J. Gen. Microbiol. 134, 1835-1845; Forst and Nealson, 1996. Microbiol. Rev. 60, 21-43). These characteristic traits are as follows: Gram stain negative rods, organism size of 0.3-2 μm in width and 2-10 μm in length [with occasional filaments (15-50 μm) and spheroplasts], yellow to orange/red colony pigmentation on nutrient agar, presence of crystalline inclusion bodies, presence of catalase, inability to reduce nitrate, presence of bioluminescence, ability to take up dye from growth media, positive for protease production, growth at temperatures below 37° C., survival under anaerobic conditions and positively motile. (Table 33). Test methods were checked using reference Escherichia coli, Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus strains. The overall results are consistent with all strains being part of the family Enterobacteriaceae and the genus Photorhabdus. Note that DEP1, DEP2, and DEP3 refer to Photorhabdus strains obtained from the American Type Culture Collection, 12301 Parklawn Drive, Rockville, Md. 20852 USA (#29304, 29999 and 51583, respectively).

[0367] A luminometer was used to establish the bioluminescence associated with these Photorhabdus strains. To measure the presence or absence of relative light emitting units, the broths from each strain (cells and media) were measured at three time intervals after inoculation in liquid culture (24, 48, 72 hr) and compared to background luminosity (uninoculated media). Several Xenorhabdus strains were tested as negative controls for luminosity. Prior to measuring light emission from the various broths, cell density was established by measuring light absorbance (560 nM) in a Gilford Systems (Oberlin, Ohio) spectrophotometer using a sipper cell. The resulting light emitting units could then be normalized to density of cells. Aliquots of the broths were placed into 96-well microliter plates (100 A1 each) and read in a Packard Lumicount™ luminometer (Packard Instrument Co., Meriden, Conn.). The measurement period for each sample was 0.1 to 1.0 second. The samples were agitated in the luminometer for 10 sec prior to taking readings. A positive test was determined as being about 5-fold background luminescence (about 1-15 relative light units). In addition, degree of colony luminosity was confirmed with photographic film overlays and by eye, after visual adaptation in a darkroom. The Gram's staining characteristics of each strain were established with a commercial Gram's stain kit (BBL, Cockeysville, Md.) used in conjunction with Gram's stain control slides (Fisher Scientific, Pittsburgh, Pa.). Microscopic evaluation was then performed using a Zeiss microscope (Carl Zeiss, Germany) 100× oil immersion objective lens (with 10× ocular and 2× body magnification). Microscopic examination of individual strains for organism size, cellular description and inclusion bodies (the latter two observations after logarithmic growth) was performed using wet mount slides (10× ocular, 2× body and 40× objective magnification) and phase contrast microscopy with a micrometer (Akhurst, R. J. and Boemare, N. E. 1990. Entomopathogenic Nematodes in Biological Control (ed. Gaugler, R. and Kaya, H.). pp. 75-90. CRC Press, Boca Raton, USA.; Baghdiguian S., Boyer-Giglio M. H., Thaler, J. O., Bonnot G., Boemare N. 1993. Biol. Cell 79, 177-185.). Colony pigmentation was observed after inoculation on Bacto nutrient agar, (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) prepared as per label instructions. Incubation occurred at 28° C. and descriptions were produced after 5 days. To test for the presence of the enzyme catalase, a colony of the test organism was removed on a small plug from a nutrient agar plate and placed into the bottom of a glass test tube. One ml of a household hydrogen peroxide solution was gently added down the side of the tube. A positive reaction was recorded when bubbles of gas (presumptive oxygen) appeared immediately or within 5 seconds. Controls of uninoculated nutrient agar and hydrogen peroxide solution were also examined. To test for nitrate reduction, each culture was inoculated into 10 ml of Bacto Nitrate Broth (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.). After 24 hours incubation with gentle agitation at 28° C., nitrite production was tested by the addition of two drops of sulfanilic acid reagent and two drops of alpha-naphthylamine reagent (see Difco Manual, 10th edition, Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich., 1984). The generation of a distinct pink or red color indicates the formation of nitrite from nitrate whereas the lack of color formation indicates that the strain is nitrate reduction negative. In the latter case, finely powdered zinc was added to further confirm the presence of unreduced nitrate; established by the formation of nitrite and the resultant red color. The ability of each strain to uptake dye from growth media was tested with Bacto MacConkey agar containing the dye neutral red; Bacto Tergitol-7 agar containing the dye bromothymol blue and Bacto EMB Agar containing the dye eosin-Y (formulated agars from Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich., all prepared according to label instructions). After inoculation on these media, dye uptake was recorded after incubation at 28° C. for 5 days. Growth on these latter media is characteristic for members of the family Enterobacteriaceae. Motility of each strain was tested using a solution of Bacto Motility Test Medium (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) prepared as per label instructions. A butt-stab inoculation was performed with each strain and motility was judged macroscopically by a diffuse zone of growth spreading from the line of inoculum. The production of protease was tested by observing hydrolysis of gelatin using Bacto gelatin (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) made as per label instructions. Cultures were inoculated and the tubes or plates were incubated at 28° C. for 5 days. Gelatin hydrolysis was then checked at room temperature, i.e. less than 22° C. To assess growth at different temperatures, agar plates [2% proteose peptone #3 with two percent Bacto-Agar (Difco, Detroit, Mich.) in deionized water] were streaked from a common source of inoculum. Plates were incubated at 20, 28 and 37° C. for up to three weeks. The incubator temperature levels were checked with an electronic thermocouple and meter to insure valid temperature settings. Oxygen requirements for Photorhabdus strains were tested in the following manner. A butt-stab inoculation into fluid thioglycolate broth medium (Difco, Detroit, Mich.) was made. The tubes were incubated at room temperature for one week and cultures were then examined for type and extent of growth. The indicator resazurin demonstrates the presence of medium oxygenation or the aerobiosis zone (Difco Manual, 10th edition, Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.). Growth zone results obtained for the Photorhabdus strains tested were consistent with those of a facultative anaerobic microorganism. In the case of unclear results, the final agar concentration of fluid thioglycolate broth medium was raised to 0.75% and the growth characteristics rechecked.

TABLE 35

Taxonomic Traits of Photorhabdus Strains

Strain

A*

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J§

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

P.

−†

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

PO

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

zealandica

P. hepialus

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Y

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

HB-Arg

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

HB Oswego

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

HB Lewiston

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

T

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

K-122

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Y

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

HMGD

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Rd

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

Indicus

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GD

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

YT

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

PWH-5

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Y

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

Megidis

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

R

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

HF-85

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

R

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

A. Cows

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

PR

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

MP1

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

T

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

MP2

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

T

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

MP3

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

R

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

MP4

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Y

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

MP5

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

PR

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GL98

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GL101

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GL138

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GL155

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GL217

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

Y

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

GL257

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

O

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

DEP1

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

W

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

DEP2

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

PR

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

DEP3

−

+

+

rd S

+

−

+

+

+

CR

+

+

+

+

+

+

−

*A = Gram's stain, B = Crystaline inclusion bodies, C = Bioluminescence, D = Cell form, E = Motility, F = Nitrate reduction, G = Presence of catalase, H = Gelatin hydrolysis, I = Dye uptake, J = Pigmentation on Nutrient Agar (some color shifts after Day 5), K = Growth on EMB agar, L = Growth on MacConkey agar, M = Growth on

#Tergitol-7 agar, N = Facultative anaerobe, O = Growth at 20° C., P = Growth at 28° C., Q = Growth at 37° C.

†+ = positive for trait, − = negative for trait; rd = rod, S = sized within Genus descriptors.

§W = white, CR = cream, Y = yellow, YT = yellow tan, T = tan PO = pale orange, O = orange, PR = pale red, R = red.

[0368] The evolutionary diversity of the Photorhabdus strains in our collection was measured by analysis of PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction) mediated genomic fingerprinting using genomic DNA from each strain. This technique is based on families of repetitive DNA sequences present throughout the genome of diverse bacterial species (reviewed by Versalovic, J., Schneider, M., D E Bruijn, F. J. and Lupski, J. R. 1994. Methods Mol. Cell. Biol., 5, 25-40). Three of these, repetitive extragenic palindromic sequence (REP), enterobacterial repetitive intergenic consensus (ERIC) and the BOX element are thought to play an important role in the organization of the bacterial genome. Genomic organization is believed to be shaped by selection and the differential dispersion of these elements within the genome of closely related bacterial strains can be used to discriminate these strains (e.g., Louws, F. J., Fulbright, D. W., Stephens, C. T. and D E Bruijn, F. J. 1994. Appl. Environ. Micro. 60, 2286-2295). Rep-PCR utilizes oligonucleotide primers complementary to these repetitive sequences to amplify the variably sized DNA fragments lying between them. The resulting products are separated by electrophoresis to establish the DNA “fingerprint” for each strain.

[0369] To isolate genomic DNA from our strains, cell pellets were resuspended in TE buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 8.0) to a final volume of 10 ml and 12 ml of 5 M NaCl was then added. This mixture was centrifuged 20 min. at 15,000×g. The resulting pellet was resuspended in 5.7 ml of TE and 300 μl of 10% SDS and 60 μl 20 mg/ml proteinase K (Gibco BRL Products, Grand Island, N.Y.) were added. This mixture was incubated at 37° C. for 1 hr, approximately 10 mg of lysozyme was then added and the mixture was incubated for an additional 45 min. One milliliter of 5M NaCl and 800 μl of CTAB/NaCl solution (10% w/v CTAB, 0.7 M NaCl) were then added and the mixture was incubated 10 min. at 65° C., gently agitated, then incubated and agitated for an additional 20 min. to aid in clearing of the cellular material. An equal volume of chloroform/isoamyl alcohol solution (24:1, v/v) was added, mixed gently then centrifuged. Two extractions were then performed with an equal volume of phenol/chloroform/isoamyl alcohol (50:49:1). Genomic DNA was precipitated with 0.6 volume of isopropanol. Precipitated DNA was removed with a glass rod, washed twice with 70% ethanol, dried and dissolved in 2 ml of STE (10 mM Tris-HCl pH8.0, 10 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA) The DNA was then quantitated by optical density at 260 nm. To perform rep-PCR analysis of Photorhabdus genomic DNA the following primers were used, REP1R-I; 5′-IIIICGICGICATCIGGC-3′ and REP2-I; 5′-ICGICTTATCIGGCCTAC-3′. PCR was performed using the following 25 μl reaction: 7.75 μl H2O, 2.5 μl 10×LA buffer (PanVera Corp., Madison, Wis.), 16 μl dNTP mix (2.5 mM each), 1 μl of each primer at 50 pM/μl, 1 μl DMSO, 1.5 μl genomic DNA (concentrations ranged from 0.075-0.480 μg/μl) and 0.25 μl TaKaRa EX Taq (PanVera Corp., Madison, Wis.). The PCR amplification was performed in a Perkin Elmer DNA Thermal Cycler (Norwalk, Conn.) using the following conditions: 95° C./7 min. then 35 cycles of; 94° C./1 min.,44° C./1 min., 65° C./8 min., followed by 15 min. at 65° C. After cycling, the 25 μl reaction was added to 5 μl of 6×gel loading buffer (0.25% bromophenol blue, 40% w/v sucrose in H2O). A 15×20 cm 1%-agarose gel was then run in TBE buffer (0.09 M Tris-borate, 0.002 M EDTA) using 8 μl of each reaction. The gel was run for approximately 16 hours at 45v. Gels were then stained in 20 μg/ml ethidium bromide for 1 hour and destained in TBE buffer for approximately 3 hours. Polaroid® photographs of the gels were then taken under UV illumination.

[0370] The presence or absence of bands at specific sizes for each strain was scored from the photographs and entered as a similarity matrix in the numerical taxonomy software program, NTSYS-pc (Exeter Software, Setauket, N.Y.). Controls of E. coli strain HB101 and Xanthomonas oryzae pv. oryzae assayed under the same conditions produced PCR fingerprints corresponding to published reports (Versalovic, J., Koeuth, T. and Lupski, J. R. 1991. Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 6823-6831; Vera Cruz, C. M., Halda-Alija, L., Louws, F., Skinner, D. Z., George, M. L., Nelson, R. J., D E Bruijn, F. J., Rice, C. and Leach, J. E. 1995. Int. Rice Res. Notes, 20, 23-24.; Vera Cruz, C. M., Ardales, E. Y., Skinner, D. Z., Talag, J., Nelson, R. J., Louws, F. J., Leung, H., Mew, T. W. and Leach, J. E. 1996. Phytopathology 86, 1352-1359). The data from Photorhabdus strains were then analyzed with a series of programs within NTSYS-pc; SIMQUAL (Similarity for Qualitative data) to generate a matrix of similarity coefficients (using the Jaccard coefficient) and SAHN (Sequential, Agglomerative, Heirarchical and Nested) clustering [using the UPGMA (Unweighted Pair-Group Method with Arithmetic Averages) method] which groups related strains and can be expressed as a phenogram (FIG. 7). The COPH (cophenetic values) and MXCOMP (matrix comparison) programs were used to generate a cophenetic value matrix and compare the correlation between this and the original matrix upon which the clustering was based. A resulting normalized Mantel statistic (r) was generated which is a measure of the goodness of fit for a cluster analysis (r=0.8-0.9 represents a very good fit). In our case r=0.924. Therefore, the collection is comprised of a diverse group of easily distinguishable strains representative of the Photorhabdus genus.

EXAMPLE 23

Insecticidal Utility of Toxin(s) Produced by Various Photorhabdus Strains

[0371] Initial “storage” cultures of the various Photorhabdus strains were produced by inoculating 175 ml of 2% Proteose Peptone #3 (PP3) (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) liquid medium with a primary variant colony in a 500 ml tribaffled flask with a Delong neck, covered with a Kaput closure. After inoculation, the flask was incubated for between 24-72 hrs at 28° C. on a rotary shaker at 150 rpm, until stationary phase was reached. The culture was transferred to a sterile bottle containing a sterile magnetic stir bar and the culture was overlayered with sterile mineral oil, to limit exposure to air. The storage culture was kept in the dark, at room temperature. These cultures were then used as inoculum sources for the fermentation of each strain.

[0372] “Seed” flasks or cultures were produced by either inoculating 2 mls of an oil overlayered storage culture or by transferring a primary variant colony into 175 ml sterile medium in a 500 ml tribaffled flask covered with a Kaput closure. (The use of other inoculum sources is also possible.) Typically, following 16 hours incubation at 28° C. on a rotary shaker at 150 rpm, the seed culture was transferred into production flasks. Production flasks were usually inoculated by adding about 1% of the actively growing seed culture to sterile 2% PP3 medium (e.g. 2.0 ml per 175 ml sterile medium). Production of broths occurred in 500 ml tribaffled flasks covered with a Kaput. Production flasks were agitated at 28° C. on a rotary shaker at 150 rpm. Production fermentations were terminated after 24-72 hrs although successful fermentation is not confined to this time duration. Following appropriate incubation, the broths were dispensed into sterile 1.0 L polyethylene bottles, spun at 2600×g for 1 hr at 10° C. and decanted from the cell and debris pellet. Further broth clarification was achieved with a tangential flow microfiltration device (Pall Filtron, Northborough, Mass.) using a 0.5 μM open-channel poly-ether sulfone (PES) membrane filter. The resulting broths were then concentrated (up to 10-fold) using a 10,000 or 100,000 MW cut-off membrane, M12 ultra-filtration device (Amicon, Beverly Mass.) or centrifugal concentrators (Millipore, Bedford, Mass. and Pall Filtron, Northborough, Mass.) with a 10,000 or 100,000 MW pore size. In the case of centrifugal concentrators, the broth was spun at 2000×g for approximately 2 hr. The membrane permeate was added to the corresponding retentate to achieve the desired concentration of components greater than the pore size used. Following these procedures, the broth was used for biochemical analysis or filter sterilized using a 0.2 μM cellulose nitrate membrane filter for biological assessment. Heat inactivation of processed broth samples was achieved by heating the samples at 100° C. in a sand-filled heat block for 10 minutes.

[0373] The broth(s) and toxin complex(es) from different Photorhabdus strains are useful for reducing populations of insects and were used in a method of inhibiting an insect population which comprises applying to a locus of the insect an effective insect inactivating amount of the active described. A demonstration of the breadth of insecticidal activity observed from broths of a selected group of Photorhabdus strains fermented as described above is shown in Table 36. It is possible that improved or additional insecticidal activities could be detected with these strains through increased concentration of the broth or by employing different fermentation methods. Consistent with the activity being associated with a protein, the insecticidal activity of all strains tested was heat labile.

[0374] Culture broth(s) from diverse Photorhabdus strains show differential insecticidal activity (mortality and/or growth inhibition) against a number of insects. More specifically, the activity is seen against corn rootworm which is a member of the insect order Coleoptera. Other members of the Coleoptera include boll weevils, wireworms, pollen beetles, flea beetles, seed beetles and Colorado potato beetle. The broths and purified toxin complex(es) are also active against tobacco budworm, tobacco hornworm and European corn borer which are members of the order Lepidoptera. Other typical members of this order are beet armyworm, cabbage looper, black cutworm, corn earworm, codling moth, clothes moth, Indian mealmoth, leaf rollers, cabbage worm, cotton bollworm, bagworm, Eastern tent caterpillar, sod webworm and fall armyworm. Activity is also observed against German cockroach which is a member of the order Dictyoptera (or Blattodea). Other members of this order are oriental cockroach and American cockroach.

[0375] Activity against corn rootworm larvae was tested as follows. Photorhabdus culture broth(s) (10 fold concentrated, filter sterilized), 2% Proteose Peptone #3 (10 fold concentrated), purified toxin complex(es), 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 were applied directly to the surface (about l.5 cm2) of artificial diet (Rose, R. I. and McCabe, J. M. 1973. J. Econ. Entomol. 66, 398-400) in 40 μl aliquots. Toxin complex was diluted in 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and the wells were infested with single, neonate Diabrotica undecimpunctata howardi (Southern corn rootworm, SCR) hatched from surface sterilized eggs. The plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained at 27° C. for the appropriate period (3-5 days). Mortality and larval weight determinations were then scored. Generally, 16 insects per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortality was generally less than 5%.

[0376] Activity against lepidopteran larvae was tested as follows. Concentrated (10-fold) Photorhabdus culture broth(s), control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3), purified toxin complex(es), 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 were applied directly to the surface (about 1.5 cm2) of standard artificial lepidopteran diet (Stoneville Yellow diet) in 40 μl aliquots. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and each well was infested with a single, neonate larva. European corn borer (Ostrinia nubilalis) and tobacco hornworm (Manduca sexta) eggs were obtained from commercial sources and hatched in-house, whereas tobacco budworm (Heliothis virescens) larvae were supplied internally. Following infestation with larvae, the diet plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained in the dark at 27° C. for the appropriate period. Mortality and weight determinations were scored at day 5. Generally, 16 insects per treatment were used in all studies. Control mortality generally ranged from about 0 to about 12.5% for control medium and was less than 10% for phosphate buffer.

[0377] Activity against cockroach was tested as follows. Concentrated (10-fold) Photorhabdus culture broth(s) and control medium (2% Proteose Peptone #3) were applied directly to the surface (about 1.5 cm2) of standard artificial lepidopteran diet (Stoneville Yellow diet) in 40 μl aliquots. The diet plates were allowed to air-dry in a sterile flow-hood and each well was infested with a single, CO2 anesthetized first instar German cockroach (Blatella germanica). Following infestation, the diet plates were sealed, placed in a humidified growth chamber and maintained in the dark at 27° C. for the appropriate period. Mortality and weight determinations were scored at day 5. Control mortality less than 10%.

TABLE 36
Observed Insecticidal Spectrum of Broths
from Different Photorhabdus Strains
Photorhabdus Strain Sensitive* Insect Species
P. zealandica       1**, 2, 4
P. hepialus         1, 2, 4
HB-Arg              1, 2, 4
HB Oswego           1, 2, 4
HB Lewiston         1, 2, 4
K-122               1, 4
HMGD                1, 4
Indicus             1, 2, 4
GD                  2, 4
PWH-5               1, 2, 4
Megidis             1, 2, 4
HF-85               1, 2, 4
A. Cows             1, 4
MP1                 1, 2, 4
MP2                 1, 2, 4
MP3                 4
MP4                 1, 4
MP5                 4
GL98                1, 4
GL101               1, 4, 5
GL138               1, 2, 4
GL155               1, 4
GL217               1, 2, 4
GL257               1, 4
DEP1                1, 4
DEP2                1, 2, 3, 4
DEP3                4
*= 3 25% mortality and/or growth inhibition vs. control
**= 1; Tobacco budworm, 2; European corn borer, 3; Tobacco hornworm, 4; Southern corn rootworm, 5; German cockroach.

EXAMPLE 24

Southern Analysis of Non-W-14 Photorhabdus Strains Using W-14 Gene Probes

[0378] Photorhabdus strais were grown on 2% proteose peptone #3 agar (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.) and insecticidal toxin competence was maintained by repeated bioassay after passage. A 50 ml shake culture was produced in 175 ml baffled flasks in 2% proteose peptone #3 medium, grown at 28° and 150 rpm for approximately 24 hours. Fifteen ml of this culture were centrifuged (700×g, 30 min) and frozen in its medium at −20° until it was thawed (slowly in ice water) for DNA isolation. The thawed W-14 culture was centrifuged (900×g, 15 min 4°), and the floating orange mucopolysaccharide material was removed. The remaining cell material was centrifuged (25,000×g, 40) to pellet the bacterial cells, and the medium was removed and discarded.

[0379] Total DNA was isolated by an adaptation of the CTAB method described in section 2.4.1 of Ausubel et al. (1994). The modifications included a high salt shock, and all volumes were increased ten-fold over the “miniprep” recommended volumes. All centrifugations were at 4° C. unless otherwise specified. The pelleted bacterial cells were resuspended in TE buffer (10 MM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 8) to a final volume of 10 ml, then 12 ml 5 M NaCl were added; this mixture was centrifuged 20 min at 15,000×g. The pellet was resuspended in 5.7 ml TE, and 300 μl of 10% SDS and 60 μl of 20 mg/ml proteinase K (in sterile distilled water, Gibco BRL Products, Grand Island, N.Y.) were added to the suspension. The mixture was incubated at 37° C. for 1 hr; then approximately 10 mg lysozyme (Worthington Biochemical Corp., Freehold, N.J.) were added. After an additional 45 min incubation, 1 ml of 5 M NaCl and 800 μl of CTAB/NaCl solution (10% w/v CTAB, 0.7 M NaCl) were added. This preparation was incubated 10 min at 65° C., then gently agitated and further incubated and agitated for approximately 20 min to assist clearing of the cellular material. An equal volume of chloroform/isoamyl alcohol solution (24:1, v:v) was added, mixed very gently, and the phases separated by centrifugation at 12,000×g for 15 min. The upper (aqueous) phase was gently removed with a wide-bore pipette and extracted twice as above with an equal volume of PCI (phenol/choloroform/ isoamyl alcohol; 50:49:1, v:v:v; equilibrated with 1M Tris-HCl, pH 8.0; Intermountain Scientific Corporation, Kaysville, Utah). The DNA precipitated with 0.6 volume of isopropanol was gently removed on a glass rod, washed twice with 70% ethanol, dried, and dissolved in 2 ml STE (10 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 8). This preparation contained 2.5 mg/ml DNA, as determined by optical density at 260 nm.

[0380] Identification of Bgl II/Hind III Fragments Hybridizing to tc-gene Specific Probes

[0381] Approximately 10 μg of genomic DNA was digested to completion with about 30 units each of Bgl II and Hind III (NEB) for 180 min, frozen overnight, then heated at 65° C. for five min, and electrophoresed in a 0.8% agarose gel (Seakem® LE, 1×TEA, 80 volts, 90 min). The DNA was stained with ethidium bromide (50 μg/ml) as described earlier, and photographed under ultraviolet light. The DNA fragments in the agarose gel were subjected to depurination (5 min in 0.2 M HCl), denaturation (15 min in 0.5 M NaOH, 1.5 M NaCl), and neutralization (15 min in 0.5 M Tris HCl pH 8.0, 1.5 M NaCl), with 3 rinses of distilled water between each step. The DNA was transferred by Southern blotting from the gel onto a NYTRAN nylon membrane (Amersham, Arlington Heights, Ill.) using a high salt (20×SSC) protocol, as described in section 2.9 of Ausubel et al. (CPMB, op. cit.). The transferred DNA was then UV-crosslinked to the nylon membrane using a Stratagene UV Stratalinker set on auto crosslink. The membranes were stored dry at 25° C. until use.

[0382] Hybidization was performed using the ECL™direct (Amersham, Arlington Heights, Ill.) labeling and detection system following protocols provided by the manufacturer. In brief, probes were prepared by covalently linking the denatured DNA to the enzyme horseradish peroxidase. Once labeled the probe was used under hybridization conditions which maintain the enzymatic activity. Unhybridized probe was removed by two gentle washes 20 minutes each at 42° C. in 0.5×SSC, 0.4% SDS, and 6M Urea. This was followed by two washes 5 minutes each at room temperature in 2×SSC. As directed by the manufacturer, ECL™ reagents were used to detect the hybridizing DNA bands. There are several factors which influence the ability to detect gene relatedness between various Photorhabdus strains and strain W-14. First, high stringency conditions have not been employed in these hybridizations. It is known in the art that varying the stringency of hybridization and wash conditions will influence the pattern and intensity of hybridizing bands. Second, Southern blots' blot to blot variation will influence the mobility of hybridizing bands and molecular weight estamates. Therefore, W-14 was included as a standard on all Southern blots.

[0383] Gene specific probes derived from the W-14 toxin genes were used in these hybridizations. The following lists the specific coordinates within each gene sequence to which the probe corresponds. A probe specific for tcaBi/Bii: 1174 to 3642 of Sequence ID #25, a probe specific for tcaC: 3637 to 6005 of Sequence ID #25, a probe specific for tcbA: 2097 to 4964 of Sequence ID #11, and a probe specific for tcdA: 1660 to 4191 of sequence ID #46. The following tables summarize Southern Blot analyses of Photorhabdus strains. In the event that hybridization of probes occurred, the hybridized fragment(s) were noted as either identical or different from the pattern observed for the W-14 strain.

TABLE 37
Southern Analysis of Photorhabdus Strains
Strains	tcdA	tcbA	tcaC	tcaBi/ii
WX-1	D	D	D	D
WX-2	D	D	−	D
WX-3	D	D	D	D
WX-4	D	D	ND	D
WX-5	D	D	D	D
WX-6	D	D	D	D
WX-7	D	D	ND	D
WX-8	D	D	D	D
WX-9	ND	D	D	D
WX-10	ND	D	D	D
WX-11	ND	D	D	D
WX-12	D	D	D	D
WX-14	D	D	D	D
WX-15	D	D	D	D
HP88	D	−	D	D
Hm	D	−	D	D
Hb	D	−	D	−
H9	D	−	I	D
B2	D	−	D	−
NC-1	D	−	D	D
WIR	D	−	D	D
W30	D	D	D	D
W-14	I	I	I	I
ND = Not determined;
− = no detectable hybridization product;
I = Identical fragment pattern;
D = Different fragment pattern.

[0384]

TABLE 38
Southern Analysis of Photorhabdus Strains
Strains	tcdA	tcbA	tcaC	tcaBi/ii
K-122	3.3, 2.8	D	−	ND
PWH-5	+	D	D	−
Indicus	D	D	3.0	I
Megidis	D	D	D	−
GD	D	D	D	−
HF-85	D	D	D	−
MP 3	D	−	D	−
MP 1	D	+	D	−
A. Cows	D	+	D	−
HB-Arg	D	ND	D	−
HMGD	D	D	D	−
HB Lewiston	D	D	D	−
HB Oswego	D	D	D	−
W-14	I	I	I	I
ND = Not determined;
− = no detectable hybridization product;
I = Identical fragment pattern;
D = Different fragment pattern.
+ = Hybridization fragment pattern not determined.

[0385]

TABLE 39
Southern Analysis of Photorhabdus Strains
Strains	tcdA	tcbA	tcaC	tcaBi/Bii
GL98	+	+	D
GL101	−	+	D
GL138	−	+	D
GL155	−	−	−
GL217	+	−	D
GL257	+	+	D
MP4	−	+	−
MP5	−	−	−
P hepialus	+	−	D
P zealandia	+	−	11.0
DEP1
DEP2
DEP3
W-14	3.8, 2.8	2.8	2.8
ND = Not determined;
− = no detectable hybridization product;
I = Identical fragment pattern;
D = Different fragment pattern.
+ = Hybridization fragment pattern not determined.

[0386] From these analyses it is apparent that homologs of W-14 genes are dispersed throughout these diverse Photorhabdus strains, as evidenced by differences in gene fragment sizes between W-14 and the other strains.

EXAMPLE 25

N-Terminal Amino Acid Sequences of Toxin Complex Peptides from Different Photorhabdus Strains

[0387] The relationship of peptides isolated from different Photorhabdus strains, as described in Example 14, were subjected to N-terminal amino acid sequencing. The N-terminal amino acid sequences of toxin peptides in several strains were compared to W-14 toxin peptides. In Table 40, a comparison of toxin peptides compared to date showed that identical or homologous (at least 40% similarity to W14 gene/peptides) toxin peptides were present in all of the strains. For example, the N-terminal amino acid sequence of TcaC, SEQ ID NO: 2, was found to be identical to that for 160 kDa peptide in HP88 but also homologs were present in strains WIR, H9, Hb, WX-1, and Hm. Some W-14 peptides or homologs have not been observed in other strains; however, not all peptides have been sequenced for toxin complexes from other strains due to N-terminal blockage or low abundance. In addition, many other N-terminal amino acid sequences (SEQ ID NOS: 82 to 88) have been obtained for toxin complex peptides from other strains that have no similarity to peptides from W-14 and in some case were identical to each other. For example, an identical amino acid sequence, SEQ ID NO: 82, was obtained for 64 kDa peptide present in both HP88 and Hb strains and a homologous sequence for a 70 kDa peptide in NC-1 strain (SEQ ID NO: 83).

TABLE 40
A Comparison of Amino Terminal Sequence Homology Between
Proteins Isolated From Non-W-14 Strains
W-14	W-14	W-14	SEQ ID
Peptide	Gene	SEQ ID	NO:	Strain	Identical	Homology
TcaAii	tcaA	15
TcaAiii	tcaA	4
TcaBi	tcaB	3	76	H9	—	74 kDa
			76	Hm	—	71 kDa
TcaBii	tcaB	5		H9	61 kDa	—
				Hm	61 kDa	—
TcaC	tcaA	2	72	Hb	—	160 kDa
				HP88	160 kDa	—
			73	WIR	—	170 kDa
			74	H9	—	180 kDa
			75	Hm	—	170 kDa
			80	WX-1	—	170 kDa
TcbAii	tcbA	1
TcbAiii	tcbA	40
TccA	tccA	8	77	Hb	—	81 kDa
TccB	tccB	7		WX-1	170 kDa	—
				WX-2	180 kDa	—
				WX-14	180 kDa	—
				WIR	170 kDa	—
			78	H9	—	170 kDa
				NC-1	140 kDa	—
			79	Hm	—	190 kDa
TcdAii	tcdA
TcdAiii	tcdA	41		Hb	57 kDa	—
			81	H9	—	69 kDa
?	?	9		Hb	86 kDa	—
				HP88	86 kDa	—
Homology refers to amino acid sequences that were at least 40% similarity to W14 gene/peptides. Similar residues were identified as being a member in one of the following five groups: (P, A, G, S, T); (Q, N, E, B, D, Z); (H, K, R); (L, I, V, M); and (F, Y, W).

EXAMPLE 26

Immunological Analysis of Photorhabdus Strains

[0388] Culture broths of Photorhabdus strains were concentrated 10 to 15 times using Centri-10 ultrafiltration device (Amicon, Inc. Beverly, Mass. 01915). The concentration of the protein ranges from 0.3 to 3.0 mg per ml. Ten to 20 μg of total protein was loaded in each well of a precast 4-20% polyacrylamide gel (Integrated Separation Systems, Natick, Mass. 01760). Gel electrophoresis was performed for 1.25 hours using a constant current set at 25 ma per gel. The gel was electro-blotted on to Hybond-ECL™ nitrocellulose membrane (Amersham Corporation, Arlington Hts, Ill. 60005) using a semi-dry electro-blotter (Pharmacia Biotech Inc., Piscataway , N.J. 08854). A constant current was applied at 0.75 ma per cm for 2.5 hours. The membrane was blocked with 10% milk in TBST (25 mM Tris HCl pH 7.4, 136 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM KCl, 0.1% Tween 20) for one hour at room temperature. Each primary antibody was diluted in 10% milk/TBST to 1:500. Other dilution between 1:50 to 1:1000 was also used. The membrane was incubated in primary antibody for at least one hour. Then it was washed thoroughly with the blocking solution or TBST. A 1:2000 dilution of secondary antibodies (goat anti-mouse IgG or goat anti rabbit TgG conjugated to horseradish peroxidase; BioRad Laboratories, Hercules, Calif. 94547) in 10% milk/TBST was applied to the membrane which was placed on a platform rocker for one hour. The membrane was subsequently washed with excess amount of TBST. The detection of the protein was performed by using an ECL (Enhanced Chemiluminescence) detection kit (Amersham International).

[0389] A panel of peptide specific-antibodies generated against W-14 peptides were used to characterize the protein composition of broths from nine non-W-14 Photorhabdus strains using Western blot analysis. In addition, one monoclonal antibody (MAb-C5F2) which recognizes TcbAiii protein in W-14-derived toxin complex was used. The results (Table 39) showed cross recognition of the antibodies to some of the proteins in these broths. In some cases, the proteins that were recognized by the antibodies were the same size as the W-14 target peptides. In other cases, the proteins that were recognized by the antibodies were smaller than the W-14 target peptides. This data indicate that some of the non-W-14 Photorhabdus strains may produce similar proteins to the W-14 strain. The difference could be due to deletion or protein processing or degradation process. Some of the strains did not contain protein(s) that could be recognized by some antibodies, however, it is possible that the concentration is significantly lower than those observed for W-14 peptides. When compared for various toxin peptide homologs these results showed peptide diversity among the Photorhabdus strains.

TABLE 41
Cross Recognition by Monoclonal Antibodies or Polyclonal Antibodies
Generated Against W-14 Peptides to Protein(s) in Broths of Selected
Non-W-14 Photorhabdus
		PAb	PAb	PAb	PAb-	PAb	PAb	PAb	PAb
Photorhabdus	MAb	TcdAii-	TcdAiii-	TcaC-	TcaBii-	TcbAiii-	TcaBi-	TcaAii-	TcaAiii-
Strain	C5F2	syn	syn	syn	syn	syn	syn	syn	syn
MP1	−	+	+	+	−	+	+	+	+
MP2	+	+	+	+	−	+	+	+	+
MP3	−	+	+	+	−	NT	+	+	−
A. Cows	−	+	+	+	−	NT	+	+	+
Hb-osw	−	−	NT	+	+	NT	+	+	+
H-Arg	−	+	+	+	−	NT	+	+	+
Hb-leu	−	+	+	+	−	NT	+	+	+
Indicus	+	+	+	+	+	NT	+	+	+
HF85	−	+	+	+	−	+	+	+	+
W-14	+	+	+	+	+	+	+	+	+
+: Positive reaction;
−: Negative reaction;
NT: Not Tested

[0390] Additional non-W-14 Photorhabdus strains were characterized by Western blot analysis using the culture broth and/or partial purified protein fractions as antigen. The panel of antibodies include MAb-C5F2, MAb-DE1 (recognizing TcdAii), PAb-DE2 (recognizing TcaB), PAb-TcbAii-syn, PAb-TcaC-syn, PAb TcaBii-syn, PAb-TcbAiii-syn, PAb-TcaBi-syn. These antibodies showed cross-reactivity with proteins in the broth and in the partial purified fractions of non-W-14 strains.

[0391] The data indicate that antibodies could be used to identify proteins in the broth as well as in the partially purified protein fractions.

TABLE 42
Cross Recognition by Monoclonal Antibodies or Plyclonal Antibodies
Generated Against W-14 Peptides to Protein(s) in Broths and/or
Partial Purified Protein Fractions of Selected Non-W14 Photorhabdus
	Monoclonal	Polyclonal Antibodies
	Antibodies		PAb	PAb	PAb	PAb-	PAb-
Photorhabdus	Mab		PAb-	TcbAii-	TcaC-	TcaBii-	TcaAiii-	TcaBi-
Strain	C5F2	Mab-DE1	DE2	syn	syn	syn	syn	syn
WX-1	+	+	+	+	+	+	+	+
WX-2	+	+	+	+	+	+	NT	+
WX-3	+	NT	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
WX-5	+	NT	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
WX-6	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
WX-7	+	+	+	+	+	+	NT	+
WX-8	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
WX-9	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
WX-10	−	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
WX-12	+	+	+	+	+	+	+	+
WX-14	+	+	+	+	NT	+	NT	+
WX-15	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
W30	+	+	+	NT	NT	NT	NT	NT
Hb	−	NT	+	NT	+	NT	−	+
H9	−	−	+	NT	+	+	NT	NT
Hm	−	NT	+	+	+	+	NT	++
HP88	−	NT	+	−	+	−	−	+
NC-1	+	−	+	+	+	+	NT	+
WIR	−	NT	+	+	+	+	+	+
W-14	+	+	+	+	+	+	+	+
−: Negative reaction;
+: Positive reaction;
NT: Not tested

EXAMPLE 27

Bacterial Expression of the tcdA Coding Region

Engineering of the tcdA Gene for Bacterial Expression

[0392] The 5′ and 3′ ends of the tcdA coding region (SEQ ID NO:46) were modified to add useful cloning sites for inserting the segment into heterologous expression vectors. The ends were modified using unique primers in Polymerase Chain Reactions (PCR), performed essentially as described in Example 8. Primer sets, as described below, were used in conjunction with cosmid 21D2.4 as template, to created products with the appropriately modified ends.

[0393] The first primer set was used to modify the 5′ end of the gene, to insert a unique Nco I site at the initiator codon using the forward primer A0F1 (5′ GAT CGA TCG ATC CAT GGC CAA CGA GTC TGT AAA AGA GAT ACC TGA TG TAT TAA AAA GCC AGT GTG 3′) and to add unique Bgl II, Sal I and Not I sites to facilitate insertion of the remainder of the gene using the reverse primer A0R1 (5′ GAT CGA TCG TAC GCG GCC GCT CGA TCG ATC GTC GAC CCA TTG ATT TGA GAT CTG GGC CGC GGG TAT CCA GAT AAT AAA CG& AGT CAC 3′).

[0394] Another PCR reaction was designed to modify the 3′ end of the gene by adding an additional stop codon and convenient restriction sites for cloning. The forward primer A0F2 (5′ ACT GGC TGC GTG GTC GAC TGG CGG CGA TTT ACT 3′) was used to amplify across a unique Sal I site in the gene, later used to clone the modified 3′ end. The reverse primer A0R2 (5′ C.GA TGC ATG CTG CGG CCG CAG GCC TTC CTC GAG TCA TTA TTT AAT GGT GTA GCG AAT ATG CAA AAT 3′) was used to insert a second stop codon (TGA) and cloning sites Xho I, Stu I and Not I. Bacterial expression vector pET27b (Novagen, Madison, Wis.), was modified to delete the Bgl II site at position 446, according to standard molecular biology techniques.

[0395] The 497 bp PCR product from the first amplification reaction (AOF1+AOR1), to modify the 5′ end of the gene, was ligated to the modified pET27b vector according to the supplier's instructions. The DNA sequences of the amplified portion of three isolates were determined using the supplier's recommended primers and the sequencing methods described previously. The sequence of all isolates was the same.

[0396] One isolate was then used as a cloning vector to insert the middle portion of the tcdA gene on a 6341 bp Bgl II to Sal I fragment. The resulting clone was called MC4 and contained all but the 3′ most portion of the tcdA coding sequence. Finally, to complete the full-length coding region, the 832 bp PCR product from the second PCR amplification (AOF2+AOR2), to modify the 3′ end of the gene, was ligated to isolate MC4 on a Sal I to Not I fragment, according to standard molecular biology techniques. The tcdA coding region was sequenced and found to be complete, the resulting plasmid is called pDAB2035.

[0397] Construction of Plasmids pDAB2036, pDAB2037 and pDAB2038 for Bacterial Expression of tcdA

[0398] The tcdA coding region was cut from plasmid pDAB2035 with restriction enzymes Nco I and Xho I and gel purified. The fragment was ligated into the Nco I and Xho I sites of the expression vector pET15 to create plasmid pDAB2036. Additionally, pDAB2035 was cut with Nco I and Not I to release the tcdA coding region which was ligated into the Nco I and Not I sites of the expression vector pET28b to create plasmid pDAB2037. Finally, plasmid pDAB2035 was cut with Nco I and Stu I to release the tcdA coding region. This fragment was ligated into the expression vector Trc99a which was cut with Hind III followed by treatment with T4 DNA polymerase to blunt the ends. The vector was then cut with Nco I and ligated with the Nco I/Stu I cut tcdA fragment. The resulting plasmid is called pDAB2038.

[0399] Expression of tcdA from Plasmid pDAB2038

[0400] Plasmid pDAB2038 was transformed into BL21 cells and expressed as described above for plasmid pDAB2033 in Example 19.

[0401] Purification of tcdA from E. coli

[0402] The expression culture was centrifuged at 10,300 g for 30 min and the supernatant was collected. It was diluted with two volumes of H2O and applied at a flow rate of 7.5 ml/min to a poros 50 HQ (Perspective Systems, Mass.) column (1.6 cm×10 cm) which was pre-equilibrated with 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.0 (Buffer A). The column was washed with Buffer A until the optical density at 280 nm returned to baseline level. The proteins bound to the column were then eluted with 1M NaCl in Buffer A.

[0403] The fraction was loaded in 20 ml aliquots onto a gel filtration column, Sepharose CL-4B (2.6×100 cm), which was equilibrated with Buffer A. The protein was eluted in Buffer A at a flow rate of 0.75 mL/min. Fractions with a retention time between 260 minutes and 460 minutes were pooled and applied at 1 mL/min to a Mono Q 5/5 column which was equilibrated with 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.0 (Buffer B). The column was washed with Buffer B until the optical density at 280 nm returned to baseline level. The proteins bound to the column were eluted with a linear gradient of 0 to 1 M NaCl in Buffer B at 1 mL/min for 30 min. One milliliter fractions were collected, serial diluted, and subjected to SCR bioassay. Fractions eluted out between 0.1 and 0.3 M NaCl were found to have the highest insecticidal activity. Western analysis of the active fractions using pAb TcdAii-syn antibody and pAb Tcdiii-syn antibody indicated the presence of peptides TcdAii and TcdAiii.

Claims

1. A composition, comprising an effective amount of a Photorhabdus protein toxin that has functional activity against an insect.

2. The composition of claim 1, wherein the Photorhabdus toxin is produced by a purified culture of Photorhabdus, a transgenic plant, baculovirus, or heterologous microbial host.

3. The composition of claim 2, wherein the Photorhabdus toxin produced by a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens.

4. The composition of claim 2, wherein the toxin is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens strain designated ATCC 55397.

5. The composition of claim 2, wherein the toxin is produced by a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens strain designated W-14.

6. The composition of claim 1, wherein the toxin is produced by a purified culture of Photorhabdus strain designated WX-1, WX-2, WX-3, WX-4, WX-5, WX6, WX-7, WX-8, WX-9, WX-10, WX-11, WX-12, WX-14, WX-15, H9, Hb, Hm, HP88, NC-1, W30, WIR, B2, ATCC#43948, ATCC#43949, ATCC#43950, ATCC#43951, ATCC#43952, DEP1, DEP2, DEP3, P. zealandrica, P. hepialus, HB-Arg, HB Oswego, HB Oswego, HB Lewiston, K-122, HMGD, Indicus, GD, PWH-5, Megidis, HF-85, A. Cows, MP1, MP2, MP3, MP4, MP5, GL98, GL101, GL138, GL55, GL217, or GL257.

7. The composition of claim 2, wherein the toxin is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens strain designated WX-1, WX-2, WX-3, WX-4, WX-5, WX-6, WX-7, WX-8, WX-9, WX-10, WX-11, WX-12, WX-14, WX-15, H9, Hb, Hm, HP88, NC-1, W30, WIR, B2, ATCC#43948, ATCC#43949, ATCC#43950, ATCC#43951, ATCC#43952, DEP1, DEP2, DEP3, P. zealandrica, P. hepialus, HB-Arg, HB Oswego, HB Oswego, HB Lewiston, K-122, HMGD, Indicus, GD, PWH-5, Megidis, HF-85, A. Cows, MP1, MP2, MP3, MP4, MP5, GL98, GL101, GL138, GL55, GL217, or GL257.

8. The composition of claim 1, wherein the toxin is represented by amino acid sequence is SEQ ID NO:12.

9. The composition of claim 6, wherein the composition is a mixture of one or more toxins produced from purified cultures of Photorhabdus.

10. The composition of claim 1 or 6, wherein the insect is of the order Lepidoptera, Coleoptera, Hymenoptera, Diptera, Dictyoptera, Acarina or Homoptera.

11. The composition of claim 1 or 6, wherein the insect species is from order Coleoptera and is Southern Corn Rootworm, Western Corn Rootworm, Colorado Potato Beetle, Mealworm, Boll Weevil or Turf Grub.

12. The composition of claim 1 or 6, wherein the insect species is from order Lepidoptera and is Beet Armyworm, Black Cutworm, Cabbage Looper, Codling Moth, Corn Earworm, European Corn Borer, Tobacco Hornworm, or Tobacco Budworm.

13. The composition of claim 1 or 6, wherein the toxin is formulated as a sprayable insecticide.

14. The composition of claim 1 or claim 6, wherein the toxin is formulated as a bait matrix and delivered in an above ground or below ground bait station.

15. A method of controlling an insect, comprising orally delivering to an insect an effective amount of a protein toxin that has functional activity against an insect, wherein the protein is produced by a purified bacterial culture of the genus Photorhabdus.

16. The method of claim 15, wherein the bacterium is a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens.

17. The method of claim 15, wherein the toxin is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens strain designated ATCC 55397.

18. The method of claim 16, wherein the toxin is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens strain designated W-14.

19. The method of claim 15, wherein the toxin is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus strains designated WX-1, WX-2, WX-3, WX-4, WX-5, WX-6, WX-7, WX-8, WX-9, WX-10, WX-11, WX-12, WX-14, WX-15, H9, Hb, Hm, HP88, NC-1, W30, WIR, B2, ATCC#43948, ATCC#43949, ATCC#43950, ATCC#43951, ATCC#43952, DEP1, DEP2, DEP3, P. zealandrica, P. hepialus, HB-Arg, HB Oswego, HB Oswego, HB Lewiston, K-122, HMGD, Indicus, GD, PWH-5, Megidis, HF-85, A. Cows, MP1, MP2, MP3, MP4, MP5, GL98, GL101, GL138, GL155, GL217, or GL257.

20. The method of claim 15, wherein the toxin is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus luminescens strains designated WX-1, WX-2, WX-3, WX-4, WX-5, WX-6, WX-7, WX-8, WX-9, WX-10, WX-11, WX-12, WX-14, WX-15, H9, Hb, Hm, HP88, NC-1, W30, WIR, B2, ATCC#43948, ATCC#43949, ATCC#43950, ATCC#43951, ATCC#43952, DEP1, DEP2, DEP3, P. zealandrica, P. hepialus, HB-Arg, HB Oswego, HB Oswego, HB Lewiston, K-122, HMGD, Indicus, GD, PWH-5, Megidis, HF-85, A. Cows, MP1, MP2, MP3, MP4, MP5, GL98, GL101, GL138, GL155, GL217, or GL257.

21. The method of claim 19, wherein a mixture of one or more toxins is produced from a purified culture of Photorhabdus and said toxins are orally delivered to an insect.

22. The method of claim 15, wherein the toxin is produced by a prokaryotic host transformed with a gene encoding the toxin.

23. The method of claim 15, wherein the toxin is produced by a eukaryotic host transformed with a gene encoding the toxin.

24. The method of claim 23, wherein the eukaryotic host is baculovirus.

25. The method of claim 15 or 19, wherein the insect is of the order Lepidoptera, Coleoptera, Hymenoptera, Diptera, Dictyoptera, Acarina or Homoptera.

26. The method of claim 15 or 19, wherein the insect species is from order Coleoptera and is Southern Corn Rootworm, Western Corn Rootworm, Colorado Potato Beetle, Mealworm, Boll Weevil or Turf Grub.

27. The method of claim 15 or 19, wherein the insect species is from order Lepidoptera and is Beet Armyworm, Black Cutworm, Cabbage Looper, Codling Moth, Corn Earworm, European Corn Borer, Tobacco Hornworm, or Tobacco Budworm.

28. The method of claim 15 or 19, wherein the toxin is formulated as a sprayable insecticide.

29. The method of claim 15 or claim 19, wherein the toxin is formulated as a bait matrix and delivered in an above ground or below ground bait station.

30. A method of isolating a gene coding for a protein subunit, comprising the steps of: constructing at least one RNA or DNA oligonucleotide molecule that corresponds to at least a part of a DNA coding region of an amino acid sequence selected from a group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO: 13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:19, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:23, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:36, SEQ ID NO:37, SEQ ID NO:38, SEQ ID NO:39, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:41, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:43, SEQ ID NO:62, SEQ ID NO:72, SEQ ID NO:73, SEQ ID NO:74, SEQ ID NO:75, SEQ ID NO:76, SEQ ID NO:77, SEQ ID NO:78, SEQ ID NO:79, SEQ ID NO:80, SEQ ID NO:81, SEQ ID NO:82, SEQ ID NO:83, SEQ ID NO:84, SEQ ID NO:85, SEQ ID NO:86, SEQ ID NO:87, and SEQ ID NO:88, wherein the nucleotide molecule is used to isolate genetic material from Photorhabdus or Photorhabdus luminescens.

31. A method for expressing a protein produced by a purified bacterial culture of the genus Photorhabdus in a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host in an effective amount so that the protein has functional activity against an insect, wherein the method comprises: constructing a chimeric DNA construct having 5′ to 3′ a promoter, a DNA sequence encoding a protein, a transcription terminator, and then transferring the chimeric DNA construct into the host.

32. The method of claim 31, wherein the protein has functional activity against insects selected from a group consisting of Coleoptera, Lepidoptera, Diptera, Homoptera, Hymenoptera, Dictyoptera, and Acarina.

33. The method of claim 31, wherein the protein encoded by the DNA sequence has an N-terminal amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO: 13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:19, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:23, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:36, SEQ ID NO:37, SEQ ID NO:38, SEQ ID NO:39, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:41, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:43, SEQ ID NO:62, SEQ ID NO:72, SEQ ID NO:73, SEQ ID NO:74, SEQ ID NO:75, SEQ ID NO:76, SEQ ID NO:77, SEQ ID NO:78, SEQ ID NO:79, SEQ ID NO:80, SEQ ID NO:81, SEQ ID NO:82, SEQ ID NO:83, SEQ ID NO:84, SEQ ID NO:85, SEQ ID NO:86, SEQ ID NO:87, and SEQ ID NO:88.

34. The method of claim 31, wherein the protein encoded by the DNA sequence includes the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:26, SEQ ID NO:28, SEQ ID NO:30, SEQ ID NO:32, SEQ ID NO:34, SEQ ID NO:35, SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:57, SEQ ID NO:59, and SEQ ID NO:61.

35. A chimeric DNA construct, adapted for expression in a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host comprising, 5′ to 3′ a transcriptional promoter active in the host; a DNA sequence encoding a Photorhabdus protein that has functional activity against an insect; and a transcriptional terminator.

36. A chimeric DNA construct of claim 35, wherein the protein encoded by the DNA sequence has an N-terminal amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO: 13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:19, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:23, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:36, SEQ ID NO:37, SEQ ID NO:38, SEQ ID NO:39, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:41, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:43, SEQ ID NO:62, SEQ ID NO:72, SEQ ID NO:73, SEQ ID NO:74, SEQ ID NO:75, SEQ ID NO:76, SEQ ID NO:77, SEQ ID NO:78, SEQ ID NO:79, SEQ ID NO:80, SEQ ID NO:81, SEQ ID NO:82, SEQ ID NO:83, SEQ ID NO:84, SEQ ID NO:85, SEQ ID NO:86, SEQ ID NO:87, and SEQ ID NO:88.

37. The chimeric DNA construct of claim 35, wherein the protein encoded by the DNA sequence has an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:26, SEQ ID NO:28, SEQ ID NO:30, SEQ ID NO:32, SEQ ID NO:34, SEQ ID NO:35, SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:57, SEQ ID NO:59, and SEQ ID NO:61.

38. The chimeric DNA construct of claim 35, wherein the DNA sequence encoding the Photorhabdus luminescens protein is selected from the group comprising SEQ ID NO:11, SEQ ID NO:25, SEQ ID NO:27, SEQ ID NO:29, SEQ ID NO:31, SEQ ID NO:33, SEQ ID NO:46, SEQ ID NO:48, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:54, SEQ ID NO:56, SEQ ID NO: 58, and SEQ ID NO:60.

39. The chimeric DNA construct of claim 35, wherein the host is baculovirus or a plant cell.

40. An isolated and substantially purified preparation comprising, a DNA molecule capable of encoding an effective amount of a protein that is produced by a bacterium of the genus Photorhabdus and that has functional activity against an insect.

41. The preparation of claim 40, wherein the bacterium is Photorhabdus luminescens.

42. A purified preparation comprising, a protein produced by Photorhabdus or Photorhabdus luminescens having an N-terminal amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO: 13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:19, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:23, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:36, SEQ ID NO:37, SEQ ID NO:38, SEQ ID NO:39, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:41, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:43, SEQ ID NO:62, SEQ ID NO:72, SEQ ID NO:73, SEQ ID NO:74, SEQ ID NO:75, SEQ ID NO:76, SEQ ID NO:77, SEQ ID NO:78, SEQ ID NO:79, SEQ ID NO:80, SEQ ID NO:81, SEQ ID NO:82, SEQ ID NO:83, SEQ ID NO:84, SEQ ID NO:85, SEQ ID NO:86, SEQ ID NO:87, and SEQ ID NO:88.

43. A purified protein preparation comprising, a protein that has an N-terminal amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, and SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO: 13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:19, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:23, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:38, SEQ ID NO:39, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:41, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:43, SEQ ID NO:62, SEQ ID NO:72, SEQ ID NO:73, SEQ ID NO:74, SEQ ID NO:75, SEQ ID NO:76, SEQ ID NO:77, SEQ ID NO:78, SEQ ID NO:79, SEQ ID NO:80, SEQ ID NO:81, SEQ ID NO:82, SEQ ID NO:83, SEQ ID NO:84, SEQ ID NO:85, SEQ ID NO:86, SEQ ID NO:87, and SEQ ID NO:88.

44. A purified protein preparation comprising, a protein selected from the group of SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:26, SEQ ID NO:28, SEQ ID NO:30, SEQ ID NO:32, SEQ ID NO:34, SEQ ID NO:35, SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:57, SEQ ID NO:59, and SEQ ID NO:61.

45. A purified DNA preparation comprising, a DNA sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:11, SEQ ID NO:25, SEQ ID NO:27, SEQ ID NO:29, SEQ ID NO:31, SEQ ID NO:33, SEQ ID NO:46, SEQ ID NO:48, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:54, SEQ ID NO:56, SEQ ID NO:58 and SEQ ID NO:60, wherein the DNA sequence is isolated from its native host.

46. A purified protein preparation comprising, a Photorhabdus luminescens protein with at least one subunit having an approximate molecular weight between 18 kDa to about 230 kDa; between about 160 kDa to about 230 kDa; 100 kDa to 160 kDa; about 80 kDa to about 100 kDa; or about 50 kDa to about 80 kDa.

47. A purified protein preparation comprising, a Photorhabdus luminescens protein with at least one subunit having an approximate molecular weight of about 280 kDa.

48. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, ATCC 55397.

49. The culture of claim 48, wherein the culture is a derivative of ATCC 55397 that produces a protein toxin that has functional activity against an insect.

50. A transgenic plant comprising in its genome, a chimeric artificial gene construction imbuing the plant with an ability to express an effective amount of a Photorhabdus protein that has functional activity against an insect.

51. The transgenic plant of claim 50, wherein the plant is transformed using acceleration of genetic material coated onto microparticles directly into cells, Agrobacteria, whiskers, or electroporation techniques

52. The transgenic plant of claim 50, wherein the selectable marker is selected from the group consisting of kanamycin, neomycin, glyphosate, hygromycin, methotrexate, phosphinothricin (bialophos), chlorosulfuron, bromoxynil, dalapon and the like.

53. The transgenic plant of claim 50, wherein the promoter is selected from the group consisting of octopine synthase, nopaline synthase, mannopine synthase, 35S, 19S, 35T, ribulose-1,6-bisphosphate (RUBP) carboxylase small subunit (ssu), beta-conglycinin, phaseolin, alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH), heat-shock, ubiquitin, zein, oleosin, napin, or acyl carier protein (ACP).

54. The transgenic plant of claim 50, wherein embryogenic tissue, callus tissue type I or II, hypocotyl, meristem, or plant tissue during dedifferentiation is used in preparing the transgenic plant.

55. The transgenic plant of claim 50, wherein the chimeric gene is a DNA sequence which encodes a Photorhabdus protein that has functional activity against an insect and at least one codon of the gene has been modified so that the codon is a plant preferred codon.

56. A method of controlling an insect comprising orally delivering to an insect an effective amount of a protein toxin, wherein the protein is produced by a transgenic plant, which said insect feeds.

57. A composition of matter, comprising a purified DNA sequence from a purified bacterial culture from the genus Photorhabdus.

58. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, H9.

59. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, Hb.

60. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, Hm.

61. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, HP88.

62. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, NC-1.

63. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, W30.

64. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, WIR.

65. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, B2.

66. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, P. zealandrica.

67. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, P. hepialus.

68. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, HB-Arg.

69. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, HB Oswego.

70. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, HB Lewiston.

71. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, K-122.

72. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, HMGD.

73. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, Indicus.

74. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GD.

75. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, PWH-5.

76. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, Megidis.

77. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, HF-85.

78. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, A. Cows.

79. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, MP1.

80. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, MP2.

81. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, MP3.

82. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, MP4.

83. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, MP5.

84. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GL98.

85. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GL155.

86. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GL101.

87. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GL138.

88. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GL217.

89. A substantially pure microorganism culture comprising, GL257.

90. A method of making an antibody against a protein fragment that is part of a protein having functional activity, where the protein is produced by bacteria of the Enterobacteracaea family, wherein the method comprises: a) isolating a fragment of the protein, where the protein fragment is at least six amino acids; b) immunizing a mammalian species with the protein fragment; and c) harvesting serum containing antibody or antibody from the spleen of the mammalian species, where the antibody harvested is antibody to the protein fragment having functional activity.

91. The method of claim 1, wherein the protein fragment is selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:63, SEQ ID NO:64, SEQ ID NO:65, SEQ ID NO:66, SEQ ID NO:67, SEQ ID NO:68, SEQ ID NO:69, SEQ ID NO:70, and SEQ ID NO:71.

92. The method of claim 90, wherein the bacteria is from the genus Photorhabdus.

93. The method of claim 90, wherein the bacteria is from the genus Photorhabdus luminescens.

94. A method of selecting a DNA fragment which encodes a portion of a protein that has functional activity, where the protein is produced from a bacteria of the Enterobacteracaea family, wherein the method comprises: a) isolating a fragment of the DNA sequence having at least 30 nucleotides; b) tagging the DNA fragment with a radioactive or chemical agent; c) hybridizing the DNA fragment to a DNA library, where the DNA library is an Enterobacteracaea cDNA or Enterobacteracaea genomic library; and. d) selecting the fragment that is hybridized to the DNA in the library that encodes for the protein that has functional activity.

95. The method of claim 94, wherein the bacteria is from the genus Photorhabdus.

96. The method of claim 95, wherein the bacteria is from the genus Photorhabdus luminescens.

97. A method of selecting a DNA fragment which encodes a portion of a protein that has functional activity, where the protein is produced from a bacteria of the Enterobacteracaea family, wherein the method comprises: a) isolating at least two primers, where a primer is a fragment of DNA having at least twelve nucleotides; b) using the primers from step a), amplifying a DNA fragment from Enterobacteracaea by using primers with polymerase chain reaction technology and purifying the DNA fragment; c) tagging the purified DNA fragment with a radioactive or chemical agent; d) hybridizing the purified DNA fragment to a DNA library, where the DNA library is an Enterobacteracaea cDNA or Enterobacteracaea genomic library;.and e) selecting a DNA fragment that is equal or larger in size to the purified DNA fragment from the library, where the selected DNA fragment or portion thereof encodes for a protein that has functional activity.

98. The method of claim 97, wherein the bacteria is from the genus Photorhabdus.

99. The method of claim 98, wherein the bacteria is from the genus Photorhabdus luminescens.